Home

User`s Manual - ThePrinterPlace.com

1. Use this chapter to configure z OS to print IPDS files on your line matrix network printer To print IPDS files you must have the IPDS option on the printer Requirements Verify that you have the following required software e PSF Version 2 2 0 with APAR OW15599 for TCP IP support e z OS Scheduler with APAR OW12236 to support two new PRINTDEV keywords IPADDR and PORTNO e TCP IP Version 3 Release 1 or higher installed and configured on z OS To obtain the PTFs associated with these APARs contact the support center 211 Chapter 9 Overview Configuration Checklist All of the following configuration steps carried out on z OS require appropriate RACF authority 1 Using the printer operator panel set up the IPDS printer emulation to 6408 6412 2 Set TCP IP addresses for the printer such as IP address gateway address or subnet mask See Configuration Tools on page 34 3 Configure the host environment See Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files on page 213 4 Verify the configuration See Verifying a TCP IP Attached Printer on z OS on page 223 5 If you want to share the printer do the procedure in Sharing Line Matrix Printers on z OS on page 224 6 If you have problems refer to Handling z OS Connectivity Problems on page 226 212 Configuration Procedure Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files To perform this procedure you need the IP addre
2. Network printer lt Back Cancel 4 If necessary uncheck the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer box 5 Click Next Windows XP 2000 Host Setup Add Printer Wizard Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port Use the following port Printer Port LPT2 Printer Port ERTS Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM2 Serial Port PAM Serial Part z Note Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer Create a new port Type Standard TCP IP Port lt Back Cancel 6 Click Create a new port and select Standard TCP IP Port from the pull down menu 7 Click Next The Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard displays 8 Click Next 105 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard x Add Port For which device do you want to add a port S Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address Pa ann in aak Port Name jee nan e nan lt Back Cancel 9 Input the printer name or IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field Click Next NOTE By default the Port Name value is identical to the Printer Name or IP Address 10 Select Custom and click Settings The Configure Standard TCP IP Port
3. barcode scanner intervention consumable label powercart rfid Example set snmp alerts 1 warning cutter Specifies which alert groups are enabled for reporting via an SNMP manager e mail alert message and or Unix syslog daemon See Table 8 on page 81 for a description of specific printer events belonging to each group The index is the index number of the SNMP manager alert table Set Commands al disables and all enables reporting of alerts in all alert groups Individual alert groups can be selectively enabled or disabled via combinations of alert group switches For example to enable warning alerts and disable cutter alerts for SNMP table entry 1 enter the following set snmp alerts 1 warning cutter set snmp syslog lt index gt active The NIC can also log SNMP alert messages to the defined SYSLOG host see the set sysinfo syslog command description Use this command to enable or disable logging of alert messages for an SNMP alert table entry lt index gt is the index number of the SNMP alert table active enables alert message logging active disables it set sysinfo label name lt string gt Example set sysinfo name salesprinter Set a descriptive name defined by lt string gt for NIC identification purposes This is not used in the operation of the print server in any way set sysinfo contact lt string gt Example set sysinfo contact P
4. EZA0458I Ping V3R1 Pinging host 9 99 12 33 Use ATTN to interrupt EZA0464I PING Ping 1 timed out NOTE If you have problems ping ing a printer refer to Handling z OS Connectivity Problems on page 226 217 Chapter 9 Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files Define the Printer to JES When a TCP IP attached printer is to be used with JES it must be defined for deferred printing mode with JES JES2 Printer Definitions Below is an example of the JES2 printer definition initialization member located in the system PARMLIB FSS FSS1 PROC PSFPROC HASPFSSM HASPFSSM PRT1 FSS FSS1 MODE FSS PRMODE LINE PAGE SOSI1 CLASS C UCS 0 SEP NOSEPDS CKPTPAGE 100 DRAIN MARK TRKCELL YES The above example is correct for JES2 3 11 and above For earlier versions of JES2 the statement is named FSSDEF and would be stated as FSSDEF FSSNAME FSS1 The value you specify for the PROC parameter must match the name on the PSF Startup procedure JES3 Printer Definitions Below is an example JES3 printer definition This example is not executable but it is intended to help the JES3 systems programmer define the printer to the z OS host FSSDEF TYPE WTR FSSNAME FSS1 PNAME PSFPROC SYSTEM SYS1 TERM NO DEVICE JNAME PRT1 JUNIT SYS1 OFF FSSNAME FSS1 MODE FSS PM LINE PAGE SOST1 CHARS YES GT12 The value you specify for the JNAME parameter must match the name of the printer in the PSF Startup
5. Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer 264 Release timer RLSTMR Specifies the amount of time to wait before a session or dialog is released without terminating the writer The ACTRLSTMR parameter specifies when this timer is to be activated Set the parameter to a value at least equal to the TIMEOUT value on the printer Printronix recommends SEC15 Page size control PAGSIZCTL Specifies if the page size forms is set by PSF Usually set to YES Remote Location name or address RMTLOCNAME Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer Configuring PSF with CRTDEVPRT On V4R2 and Above This section describes how to create a printer device description 1 At the iSeries command line enter a command in the form CRTDEVPRT DEVD P7000 DEVCLS LAN TYPE IPDS MODEL 0 LANATTACH IP AFP YES PORT 5001 FONT 11 FORMFEED CONT RMTLOCNAME 128 9 12 134 USRDFNOBJ AFP NETPRTP7000 PSFCFG TEXT Printronix P7000 NETWORK PRINTER Only use the USRDFNOBJ parameter if it was defined in the previous procedure A completed screen looks like the example shown in Figure 36 Configuring PSF with CRTDEVPRT On V4R2 and Above Create Device Desc Printer CRITDEVFRT Device description ssesesee Device CIASS s sassssssnnssnnsnnnnrnnnnennnnnn Device type ssssssssnsnsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns Device model ss sssssssensennnrennnrenne LAN attachment ccs
6. FORMDEF A10110 CHARS GT15 JOB SEPARATOR FORMDEF JOBLTR OUTPUT PAGEDEF V06483 JOB SEPARATOR PAGEDEF FORMDEF A10110 CHARS GT15 JOB SEPARATOR FORMDEF DSHDR OUTPUT PAGEDEF V06483 DS SEPARATOR PAGEDEF FORMDEF A10110 CHARS GT15 DS SEPARATOR FORMDEF MSGDS OUTPUT PAGEDEF A06462 MESSAGE DATASET PAGEDEF FORMDEF A10110 MESSAGE DATASET FORMDEF FONT300DDDSN SYS1 FONT300 SYSTEM FONTS 300 PEL DISP SHR PSEGO1DDDSN SYS1 PSEGLIB SYSTEM PAGE SEGMENTS DISP SHR HOLAY01DDDSN SYS1 OVERLIB SYSTEM MEDIUM OVERLAYS DISP SHR PDEF01DDDSN SYS1 PDEFLIB SYSTEM PAGEDEFS DISP SHR FDEF0O1DDDSN SYS1 FDEFLIB SYSTEM FORMDEFS DISP SHR i HEARERS REAAREER ERE SAI RRIR NATH ERIE LEA NI THERESE RNI AEE EE REREAD RASH ER RER EREAB RARE ER ERE SERED 220 Configuration Procedure PRINTDEV BBR SR A aS ORISSA IS IIS III III IIS IIIS IIS II III III II III III II II III III II ATI ATI AIA HPRTICNTL PRT1PRINTDEV FONTDD FONT300 300 PEL FONT LIBRARY DD HOVLYDD OLAY01 OVERLAY LIBRARY DD PSEGDD PSEGO1 SEGMENT LIBRARY DD PDEFDD PDEF01 PAGEDEF LIBRARY DD FDEFDD FDEF01 FORMDEF LIBRARY DD JOBHDR JOBHDR JOB HEADER SEPARATOR OQUTPUT JOBTRLR JOBTLR JOB TRAILER SEPARATOR OQUTPUT DSHDR DSHDR DATA SET HEADER SEPARATOR MESSAGE MSGDS MESSAGE DATA SET OUTPUT BUFNO 5 NUMBER OF WRITE DATA BUFF
7. set prn timeout lt int gt none Example set prn timeout none Terminate the print job sent to the parallel port if it is not printed after the timeout period in minutes lt int gt expires The lt int gt value ranges from 0 though 255 with 0 indicating no timing out to take place This is the default setting and should be fine for most print setups 327 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 328 set prn opost Example set prn opost Allow or disallow output processing on the parallel port such as carriage return insertion e g onlcr set prn onlcr Example set prn onlcr Enable or disable carriage return insertion on the parallel port This may be needed for Unix text jobs coming through with solitary linefeeds This feature is almost always set at the model level rather than the I O port level set prn xtab lt int gt none Example set prn xtab none Set the tabstop width as indicated by lt int gt The range is 1 through 16 spaces set prn from default Set all parallel port settings back to factory defaults set prn from stored Set all current parallel port settings to the values stored in flash memory set snmp To add a user named snmp with root privileges follow the steps below 1 Login to the NIC as a root user 2 Add a user named snmp set user add snmp 3 Set the user type to root set user type snmp root 4 Set the password for the snmp user set user passwd snmp snmppassword 5 Save the cha
8. NOTE The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must match the password set on the unit 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset Adjusting Polling Time NDS And Bindery Setups Adjusting Polling Time NDS And Bindery Setups To set the poll time the NIC will use when checking for new jobs under a PSERVER setup Netware 4 x and 5 x 1 Login to Netware Administrator as a user with security equal to Admin on your Novell host 2 Double click on the printer object for which you wish to change the poll time This will bring up the printer object detail pages Click Configuration to display the configuration page Change the Service Interval to the desired number in seconds NOTE You may also want to change the Service mode for forms to Change forms as needed If you do not do this the NIC will need to poll the file server twice as much to get all the information it needs 5 Repower the NIC by turning the printer off and on to make the changes take effect Netware 3 x 1 Login to PCONSOLE on your Novell host as supervisor 2 Select Print Server Information from the main menu and press ENTER 3 Select the print server you have been using for your PSERVER setup and press ENTER By default this will be M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print servers Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A 4 Sele
9. Resource Name Auto Connect Stop Auto Connect Click here NOTE Changes will only take effect after you reset the line matrix printer from the System page 4 Enter the address of your system for the host IP address The port address is the port configured for your telnet server It is usualy port 23 The Resource name will be the printer name defined in the VTAM portion of your Telnet server configuration For this example use RMT3 Configuration Screens 5 Select auto connect 6 Go to the system page and reboot for the changes to take effect 7 After the printer reboots enter the command DTCPIP T CONN from the SDSF console The following messages show that the printer is connected D TCPIP T CONN EZZ6064 TELNET CONNECTION DISPLAY 044 EN TSP CONN TY IPADDR PORT LUNAME APPLID PTRLOGMODE 00000468 9 99 98 62 2000 RMT3 PRINTER PPE LU3PRT noone PORT 23 ACTIVE PROF CURR CONNS 1 3 OF 3 RECORDS DISPLAYED You are now ready to print 291 Chapter 12 Configuration Screens 292 13 AS 400 Configuration TN5250 Setting Up TN5250 Print Queues On AS 400 Start with V3R7 or later and the most recent PTF level The AS 400 should have tcpip installed be fully configured and functional To set up the TN5250 print queues do the following 1 Make sure the AS 400 has sufficient resources to add additional virtual devices Establish the IP value not the dns name of the AS 400 Set
10. System is in upgrade mode without an IP address Yellow 2 Hz flash Table 5 shows the NET LED states for various network conditions when a WLAN card is inserted into the wireless NIC The NIC wired interface will not affect the NET LED while a WLAN card is present Wireless Network Indicator Table 5 Wireless NIC NET LED States WLAN Network Condition NET LED Network link quality is good Green Network link quality is fair Yellow Network link quality is bad Red Network link not present Off Network link present and transmitting Link quality blink Table 6 shows the NET LED states for various network conditions when no WLAN card is found or present Table 6 Wireless NIC NET LED States No WLAN Wired SNS ALANIS Condition NET LED Network link is present Green Network link is not present Off Network link present and transmitting Blink 27 Chapter 1 ADAPTER ADAPTER 1 WLAN DIP Switch 2 Interfaces DIP Switches On the back of the printer you will find a small window where you can access two DIP switches labeled 1 and 2 see Figure 2 on page 24 The functions of the DIP switches are explained in Table 7 NOTE The DIP switches are not marked with on or off labels Instead the status of the switch is indicated by its position up or down If the interface card has been installed upside down i e the DIP switches are to the l
11. The frequency applies to all TCP applications that direct TCP to send keep alive transmissions The default frequency is after about two hours of inactivity For printing on TCP IP attached printers it is recommended that you specify a shorter interval than the default such as 10 minutes for the interval between keep alive transmissions 216 Configuration Procedure Also if any target host requires that the keep alive packet contain data specify SENDGARBAGE TRUE For example KEEPALIVEOPTIONS INTERVAL 5 SENDGARBAGE TRUE ENDKEEPALIVEOPTIONS GATEWAY The Packet Size parameter of the GATEWAY statement defines the maximum transmission unit MTU for the z OS host For 10 100Base T Ethernet Interface printers the MTU size is fixed at 1024 bytes The value cannot be adjusted Verify the Printer Connection To verify that the z OS system can establish a connection with the TCP IP attached printer ping the printer from the MVS system From a TSO session enter the following commana TSO PING ip address In JES2 enter the following command from the System Display and Search Facility SDSF menu 6 ping ip address ip_address specifies the IP address of the Ethernet Here is an example of a successful ping command EZA0458I Ping V3R1 Pinging host 9 99 12 33 Use ATTN to interrupt EZA0463I PING Ping 1 response took 0 084 seconds Successes so far 1 Here is an example of an unsuccessful ping command
12. printer_ip IP address of the printer or the DNS name without brackets diprn NIC remote printer name Explanation of command line m indicates the model rmodel v indicates the use of dev null as a file interlock to avoid contention orm is the name of remote Print Server orp is the name of the remote printer on the remote Print Server ob3 declares that the remote Print Server is a BSD type NOTE The Ipshut command stops the HP spooling system do not perform when print jobs are active The default NIC destination name is d1prn however this name can be changed To verify the queue name print an Ethernet Test Page or telnet to the adapter and run a list dest command To print to this queue use normal Ip syntax lp dqueue_name filename Solaris 2 6 7 NIC Setup Solaris 2 6 7 NIC Setup NOTE Requires Superuser privilege in the borne shell Assume that you can ping and Telnet to the adapter The IP address of the NIC adapter must be placed in the etc hosts file Syntax lpadmin p queue_name v dev null lpadmin p queue_name i usr lib 1p model netstandard lpadmin p queue_name o dest host_ name o protocol bsd o timeout 60 lpadmin p queue_name s host name dlprn I any enable queue_name accept queue_name where queue _name any name but not the name in the etc hosts file or d1prn host_name name in etc hosts file Troubleshooting This
13. store rprinter add PSERVERname printernumber NICdestination An example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER NLM called pserver1 and sending jobs to the NIC destination diprn is store rprinter add pserverl 0 dlprn Leave this NIC login session and log on to the NetWare 3 x file server as Supervisor Load a PSERVER NLM if one is not already loaded This will be the PSERVER that the NIC services as an RPRINTER So it must match the PSERVER name given in step 2 Enter PCONSOLE Select Print Queue Information from the PCONSOLE Main Menu Click Insert to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER This can be any name you would like Click Escape to return to the Main Menu Select Print Server Information and press ENTER Click Insert when the list of existing print servers displays Select the print server that you want the NIC to service as an RPRINTER This is the PSERVER NLM loaded in step 4 Select Print Server Configuration from the menu that displays Select Printer Configuration from the next menu to display a list of configured printers Select an item from the list e g an existing printer name or Not Installed to display the printer configuration window 161 Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration 162 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Assig
14. 6 Novell Configuration s 155 OVEOIVICW aean e aaae n aa etr a E a A E a Ea Aaa 155 Novell Environment Description cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 155 Novell NIC Configuration seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerieesrererrrerrne 156 Using HTML Forms Sirianna na a AE 157 Novell Host Configuration c cccccceceeeeeeeeeseteeeteseeeeeaes 158 NetWare Version 3 x PSERVER Setup aeee 158 NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup 0 0 160 NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x PSERVER Setup 163 NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x RPRINTER Setup 166 Novell Troubleshooting TipS cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 168 NetWare 3 x No PSERVER Connection 20 169 NetWare 4 x and 5 x No PSERVER Connection 170 7 Novell Configuration For 10 100Base T Interfaces c008 171 OVEIVIOW haistan a ei ert eit ei 171 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T ceeeeee 172 Preferred File Server NDS and Bindery Setups 172 Setting Password Security NDS And Bindery Setups ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 175 Adjusting Polling Time NDS And Bindery Setups 177 Changing The NIC Name NDS And Bindery Setups 178 Changing The NIC Frame Type NDS And Bindery Setups ccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeees 180 Changing The NIC Mode NDS And Bindery Setups 181 Setting The NIC NDS Context NDS Setups 182 Setting The NIC Pref
15. 8 Change the mode to correspond with the type of file you are going to print By default ASCII is set for text only files but if you need to print both text and graphics select binary using the bin command 9 Place the file to be printed within this directory on the NIC so it can be spooled and printed Syntax put filename 10 Close the FTP session unless you have more jobs to print Syntax quit Direct Socket Printing Within TCP IP environments there are some setups which require the host to print directly to a TCP port number on the NIC bypassing all of the higher level destination queue names If you run into a setup which requires this you will need to define two parameters for a new print setup 1 NIC IP address The IP address or host name of the print server to which you want to print 2 NIC TCP port number A pre defined number for the I O port on the print server 9100 is the default port number Though the host will be sending directly to a TCP port number on the NIC the port numbers are still mapped to destinations queues in case there is some type of special processing or logging to be done to the job However the destination name is of no concern in this type of printer definition Only the two parameters mentioned above need to be defined for printing to work NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network Unix Troubleshooting Tips This section provides information on possible solutions to some stand
16. Sets the maximum allowable amount of clock skew in seconds or minutes that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is invalid store kerberos config clockskew lt clock_skew gt lt s m gt The time units cannot be mixed and there must at least be one space between the lt renew_life_time gt value and the time unit s or m The default is 300 seconds i e five minutes The minimum allowable value is 60 seconds i e 1 minute The maximum allowable value is 900 seconds i e 15 minutes NOTE The Microsoft step by step Guide to Kerberos 5 krb5 1 0 Interoperability recommends that your system clock be sychronized within two minutes to the KDC system s clock Otherwise clock skew errors will cause Kerberos authentication to fail If this is the case the clock skew default may need to scale down to two minutes Sets the maximum allowable ticket lifetime in seconds minutes hours or days store kerberos config tktlife lt life_time gt lt s m h d gt lt life_time gt is between 300 seconds and 259200 seconds 3 days The time units cannot be mixed and there must be at least one space between the lt life_time gt value and the time units s m h or d Default value is 43200 seconds Sets the maximum allowable renewable lifetime in seconds minutes hours or days store kerberos config renewlife lt renew_ life time gt lt s m h d gt lt renew_life_time gt is 0 i e no limit or betw
17. The SSID of the Print Server must be configured to match the Access Point s SSID which also has Kerberos enabled For example if a Windows 2000 user created the password aBcd 12345 and the Access Point s realm is set to REALM PRINTRONIX COM the following telnet commands are used store kerberos password aBcd 12345 store kerberos config krealm REALM PRINTRONIX COM NOTE If the Kerberos authentication fails the user will not be able to Telnet to the Print Server via the wireless LAN interface In this case Telnet to the Print Server via the wired LAN interface It should display an error message indicating the reason for the Kerberos authenticaion failure HTML Forms The NIC settings can be configured over TCP IP through a standard Web browser The NIC Web pages provide a way to access some of the commands built into the print server NOTE If a router is used make sure a Gateway value is configured To access the NIC home page 1 Make sure the print server has an IP address and Subnet Mask so it is recognizable on your TCP IP network 2 Make sure your network station can successfully ping the NIC over the network 3 Direct your Web browser to the URL http IPaddress e g http 192 75 11 9 where IPaddress is the IP address of your NIC NOTE If you cannot access the web page refer to Web Browser HTTP Problem on page 124 51 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools 52 The NIC HTML structure is divi
18. ccceeeeeeeeeeteeeees 29 Conventions Used In This Manual cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 30 Notes And Notices oreesa e ie ea a EREA 31 Printronix Customer Support Center seser 31 Installation And Configuration 33 Installation e a aa aa a duces aa TETEA EEEE 33 Connecting To The Network ccceeeeeseeeeseeeeeneeeeees 33 Configuration Tools cccccceceeeeeneeeceeeeeseneeeseneeeeeneeeesaneeetenees 34 Configuration Using The Control Panel 34 NIC Verification cececccccceeesceeeeesssneeeeesesneeeeeeseseeeeesseaes 39 Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Control Panel sche cuvincis ba eeiidlichasinetrnatetes ts 40 Kerberos Enabled Wireless NIC Configuration 49 HTML FOmmsis cccc tact ceere ieee cde ee tein eee 51 Configuration Alternatives cccccecseeeeseeesesteeeeneeeeees 54 Table of Contents 3 Embedded NIC Web Page 068 55 OVGIVIOW ziion cited aa nean aa ean nad ii aiaa tats 55 Configuration isei iae eee ces eres aneian aeaiia a Sae seeders 56 Network Configuration eeeseseeseeesessereerreerrrerrrrerrsereeren 57 TCP IP Network sssssesesssessesrsrsrressssrerenrerntsernserrnssrnnens 57 BOQ l h ANE EA A A E A A 59 Windows Network NetBIOS TCP IP n e 61 Novell Network 20 0 0 eeecccceeeeesneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaes 62 Print Path Configuration c cccccceeseseeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeseneeeee 64 Destination Settings
19. e g M_091C1A should show within this window This means the NIC knows about this new Novell print queue it must service as a PSERVER Therefore it will poll this queue regularly looking for jobs to print NOTE The NIC can service up to four printers on one file server It cannot service multiple file servers at one time NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup These steps are for Novell environments with Netware 3 x or earlier file servers To configure a new RPRINTER on a NetWare 3 x network 1 Log into the NIC command shell npsh as root If you have TCP IP available and this print server already has an IP address stored within it you can use the built in HTML configuration forms or a Telnet session Please see Configuration Tools on page 34 for further details If you have only Novell available you will need to use a PC laptop or terminal NOTE If you use HTML configuration you will need to go to the Network Configuration HTML form i e http IPaddress networkConf html1 e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 and look under the Novell section The settings in the following step are found there If using a Telnet session you will need to manually execute the commands listed in the next step NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup Store the RPRINTER settings on the NIC This will refer to an existing PSERVER NLM on the file server or to one that you will create later in these steps Syntax
20. list ditt List the differences between the current settings and the stored settings in flash memory Normally you want these values to match so issue a save command followed by a reset command list ifc Lists the current UTP interface settings e g link integrity For the wireless NIC the WLAN interface settings will also be included The WLAN parameters are displayed in the following manner after the interface list has been displayed WLAN ifnum lt fnum gt ssid lt network name gt mode lt net mode gt channel lt channel num gt antenna lt antenna type gt speed lt speed flags gt 335 Chapter 15 Complete Command List preamble lt en type gt pmm lt sleep time gt defkey lt key num gt auth lt auth method gt user lt auth user name gt pass lt auth password gt txpwr lt powel gt opts lt option list gt Status lt status gt Quality lt comms quality gt Where lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt network name gt is a 1 to 32 ASCII character string lt net mode gt is the type of network mode of operation adhoc pseudo or managed lt channel num gt is the RF channel being used for communication lt antenna type gt is the type of antenna Primary Auxiliary or Diverse lt speed flags gt is the speeds being used for communication 0 2 5 11 or auto lt len type gt indicates the selected preamble
21. ora hardware configuration definition HCD depending on the version of your z OS system e When using a version earlier than z OS 4 1 0 use an MVSCP e When using a version of z OS 4 1 0 or later use an HCD or an MVSCP For more information about using these methods refer to e MVS ESA Migration Planning Dynamic I O Configuration e MVS ESA Hardware Configuration Using the Dialog Modify the TCP IP Profile in z OS The TCP IP profile contains system configuration statements used to initialize the TCP IP address space Of those statements the following are subject to special considerations when you are printing from PSF on TCP IP attached printers Samples of these statements are printed in bold in the example shown in Figure 24 Configuration Procedure ACBPOOLSIZE 1000 ADDRESSTRANSLATIONPOOLSIZE 1500 CCBPOOLSIZE 150 DATABUFFERPOOLSIZE 160 32768 ENVELOPEPOOLSIZE 750 IPROUTEPOOLSIZE 300 LARGEENVELOPEPOOLSIZE 50 RCBPOOLSIZE 50 SCBPOOLSIZE 256 SKCBPOOLSIZE 256 SMALLDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE 256 TCBPOOLSIZE 512 TINYDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE 256 UCBPOOLSIZE 100 KEEPALIVEOPTIONS INTERVAL 10 SENDGARBAGE FALSE ENDKEEPALIVEOPTIONS GATEWAY Network First hop Linkname Packet Size Subnet mask Subnet value 9 BPCLAN 2000 0 255 255 0 0 99 12 0 DEFAULTNET 9 99 12 254 BPCLAN 2000 0 255 255 0 0 Figure 24 Modifying TCP IP Profile This section contains information about the statements the special considerations that appl
22. printout Do the appropriate procedure for the type of NIC contained in the printer 2 dip switches Wireless NIC Procedure A page 345 2 dip switches Ethernet version greater than 1 1 20 0 Procedure A page 345 2 dip switches Ethernet version less than 1 1 20 0 Procedure B page 346 3 dip switches any ethernet version Procedure B page 346 No dip switches embedded NIC Any version Procedure C page 347 ADAPTER Procedure A WLAN ADAPTER 3 4 5 6 Turn the printer off Flip dip switch 1 down on the NIC adapter Turn the printer on and wait about 1 minute for the adapter to boot Flip dip switch 1 up Turn printer off wait 15 seconds then turn it back on Re program the IP address information from the front panel NOTE Steps 1 5 also clears the IP address information and SSID and sets the adapter back to the factory default Type the following at the telnet prompt set user passwd root save reset 345 Chapter 16 NIC Security 346 Wait about 1 minute for the adapter to reboot after the reset command Turn the printer off wait 15 seconds and turn the printer back on Wait 1 minute for the adapter to boot Telnet back into the adapter logging in as root with no password and pressing Enter Procedure B 1 w NO a A Turn the printer off Flip dip switch 2 down on the NIC adapter Turn the printer on and wait about 1 minute for the adapter to boo
23. store pserver novell passwd ptnx Store the password lt password gt for the NIC to use when logging in to a Novell file server This password would have to match one set on the file server store pserver novell frametype ethernet2 802 2 802 3 802 2snap autosense Sets the frame type for the Novell protocol store pserver novell mode auto bindery nds Example store pserver novell mode auto bindery nds Stores the mode for the unit to operate in either autosense Bindery or NDS store pserver novell context lt context gt Example store pserver novell context context Stores the print server object in any context within the NDS tree choosen store pserver novell tree lt tree gt Example store pserver novell tree tree Stores the print server object in a specified tree store pserver novell fserver add del lt fileserver gt Example store pserver novell fserver add fs1 Add or remove a server entry on the NIC for the Novell file server it will be servicing 315 Chapter 15 Complete Command List ADAPTER 316 WLAN ADAPTER store pserver smb workgrp lt workgroup gt Example store pserver smb workgrp eng Define a different Windows workgroup as defined by lt workgroup gt for the NIC to be visible within should be 14 characters or less By default the print server only comes up within the group called WORKGROUP store pserver lpd destldefault Example store pserver lpd destldefault
24. the default value 170 seconds If more than one system will be using the printer set the value to NOMAX which causes PSF 400 to wait indefinitely for a response to an activation request V3R7 V4R1 CRTPSFCFG CHGPSFCFG ACTRLSTMR NORDYF Specifies the point at which the release timer RLSTMR is activated Set to NORDYF This means that the release timer is activated when there are no spooled files in the printer s output queue with a status of RDY and the last page of the last spooled file processed has printed NORDYF is used so that all files with a status of RDY are printed before releasing the session which does not terminate the writer 271 Chapter 11 Sharing The AS 400 Printer On The Network Table 11 Printer Sharing continued AS 400 Recommended PAu Version Where Set Parameter Value Description V3R7 CRTPSFCFG RLSTMR SEC15 Specifies the amount of V4R1 CHGPSFCFG time to wait before a session or dialog is released without terminating the writer The ACTRLSTMR parameter specifies when this timer is to be activated Set the parameter to a value at least equal to the TIMEOUT value on the printer The recommended value is SEC15 V3R7 CRTDEVPRT ACTTMR NOMAX The value specifies the V4R1 CHGDEVPRT number of seconds that PSF 400 will wait for a printer to respond to an activation request If only one system will be using the printer use the default
25. 120 status 92 TCP IP 57 Network Indicator 25 Network Interface Card 17 Network Name 802 11b 59 Network sharing AS 400 269 NIC 17 cannot be found 120 cannot be found on network troubleshooting 149 change destination names 98 configuration 10 100Base T Novell 172 configuration for AIX 4 144 configuration menu 56 configuration Windows 94 destinations 21 guest user 343 HTML structure 52 installation 33 naming schemes 354 passwords 343 queues 21 reset password 345 root user 343 Index running AS400 with TN5250 296 security 343 Set NDS content 182 Set preferred NDS tree 183 special features 18 users 343 verification 39 NIC NDS content NDS setup 182 NIC preferred NDS tree NDS setup 183 NIC TCP IP settings OS 2 203 No extra page troubleshooting 152 No form feed troubleshooting 152 Notes 31 Notices 31 Novell environment 155 Host configuration 158 host configuration 10 100Base T 184 HTML forms 157 NIC configuration 156 NIC configuration 10 100Base T 172 troubleshooting 168 Novell Network 62 File Server 63 FrameType 63 NDS 63 Protocol 62 Pserver 63 Rprinter 64 Service Type 63 369 Index Npsh access methods 305 command prefixes 305 O Onlcr 151 Options 802 11b 60 OS 2 LPR command 204 LPR Port Daemon 207 LPR print queue 205 NIC TCP IP settings 203 TCP IP access problem 208 workstation configuration 204 OS
26. 2 TCP IP 303 P Parameters Kerberos 46 LEAP 45 Password security Bindery setup 175 NDS setup 175 NetWare 3 x 175 NetWare 4 x 175 NetWare 5 x 175 Passwords 88 802 11b 61 NIC 343 reset 345 Periodic Ping 355 370 Polling time adjusting 177 Bindery setup 177 NDS setup 177 NetWare 3 x 177 NetWare 4 x 177 NetWare 5 x 177 Port TN5250 3270 74 Power Management Mode 802 11b 60 Preamble 802 11b 60 Preferred file server adding 173 Bindery setup 172 NDS setup 172 removing 174 Prefixes command 306 Print job monitoring 349 Print Model 69 Banner Page 69 configuration 68 Filter 69 Header String 69 Model Type 68 Name 68 Printer Configuration 70 Trailer String 69 Print Path Back Channel 65 Banner Page 66 configuration 64 destination settings 64 Filter 66 Header String 67 Log Path Port 67 Log Path Type 67 Model Type 66 Name 65 Printer Configuration 67 Selected Log Path 67 Selected Model 66 Services 65 Trailer String 67 Print server setup HTML method 176 manual Telnet method 176 Printer errors 122 logging 349 logging through logpaths 350 monitoring 349 sharing parameters AS 400 270 status screen 53 Printer Configuration Print Model 70 Print Path 67 Printer Inventory Manager TN3270E 280 Printer management implementation 301 Printer monitoring Agent model 301 Manager model 301 MIB 302 SNMP 303 tools 303 Index
27. 303 community name 304 configuration 77 manager alert posting 77 Software downloading 351 Solaris 2 6 135 Solaris 7 135 Special features NIC 18 Speed setting 10 100Base T 29 Speed 802 11b 60 Stair stepped output troubleshooting 151 Start Stop Auto Connect TN5250 3270 76 Status I O Port 91 menu 91 Network 92 Status screen printer 53 Store commands 307 TN5250 295 Support technical 31 Syslog alert posting 78 System configuration 89 information 85 T TCP access lists 347 TCP IP access troubleshooting 122 configuring AS 400 for ASCII 231 TCP IP access problem AS 400 242 OS 2 208 Unix 152 TCP IP Network 57 Interface 58 Routing 58 TCPIP Configuration TN3270E 279 Technical support 31 119 Telnet 54 Telnet commands TN5250 295 TN3270E Configuration Screens 289 Printer Inventory Manager 280 Programs materials 276 TCPIP Configuration 279 VTAM Definitions 277 z OS Configuration 275 TN5250 Auto Connect command 296 command list 295 Font Identifier 299 job formatting 297 running AS400 296 set up connection device via telenet 294 set up print queue on AS 400 293 Index Telnet commands 295 user supplied values 295 TN5250 3270 Auto Connect 76 configuration 73 Device Description 75 Device Type 76 Host IP 74 Message Queue Library 75 Message Queue Name 75 Mode 74 Port 74 Resource Name 75 Start Stop Auto Connect 76 WSCST Library 76 WSCST Name 76 Tool
28. 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and enter the preferred tree in the NDS Preferred Tree field 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect 183 Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell tree tree 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T ADAPTER 184 WLAN ADAPTER This section covers PSERVER and RPRINTER NPRINTER setups on the NIC The NIC can handle up to eight RPRINTER NPPRINTER setups Although the entire print setup is done through Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE you may need to communicate directly with the print server in order to modify settings monitor the unit etc For Netware 4 x and Netware 5 x environments you can obtain a NWAdmn3x snap in program called MPAdmin This snap in can be used to configure PSERVER setups as well as additional settings on the NIC NOTE
29. CTLD SYSOPR QSYS Name LIBL CURLIB 1 2550 NOMAX NONE IMGA01 IMGAO02 1 31 NO YES 1 3600 NOMAX Name Name LIBL CURLIB Character value NONE Name NONE Name LIBL CURLIB DTAARA DTAQ FILE Name NONE Name LIBL CURLIB Name NONE Name LIBL CURLIB NO YES Name NONE Name LIBL CURLIB OPR 265 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer Publishing information Support duplex cccceeeee UNKNOWN UNKNOWN SIMPLEX DUPLEX Support ColOl eeeeeeeeseeeeeeees UNKNOWN UNKNOWN NOCOLOR COLOR Pages per minute black UNKNOWN 1 32767 UNKNOWN Pages per minute color UNKNOWN 1 32767 UNKNOWN LOCATION adna e ei hei e BLANK Data steams supported UNKNOWN UNKNOWN PCL PS PDF for more values Text description BLANK Additional Parameters Remote network identifier NETATR Name NETATR NONE Workstation customizing object NONE Name NONE LID AN tinh ce eee Name LIBL CURLIB Authorityicss2 3s ccetedestsdessidis Ges te ALL Name LIBCRTAUT CHANGE Figure 36 Example CRTDEVPRT Command V4R2 and above 2 Values must be entered for the following parameters Device Description DEVD The device description or name Device Class DEVCLS Specify LAN Device Type TYPE Specify IPDS Device Model MODEL Specify 0 LAN a
30. Control Panel Double click Printers Select Create a Printer from the Printer menu to display the dialogue box in Figure 22 Create Printer Printer Name Driver Accel a Writer 8200 v2014 103 Setup Description Print to LPT1 O Share this printer on the network Share Name Location Figure 22 Create a Printer Dialogue Box 4 Define a name to represent this print setup and select the appropriate driver for the printer that will be used in this setup For printer driver choose generic text Epson FX1050 or Proprinter 5 Under the Print To field select Other 114 Windows NT 3 51 Host Setup 6 Select LPR Port from the list that displays and click OK to bring up a dialogue box similar to the one in Figure 23 Add LPR compatible printer Name or address of server providing Ipd l Name of printer or print queue on that server Figure 23 Add LPR Compatible Printer Dialogue Box 7 Type in the IP address or host name of the NIC in the first field 8 Type in the name of a predefined destination queue on the NIC in the second field NOTE This name must be a name of an existing destination queue on the NIC and it must be lowercase by default You will probably use diprn 9 Click OK when you have specified these two fields You now have a new network printer which relies on the standard TCP IP print protocol LPD to print remo
31. Epson emulation Be sure to save the printer emulation as the power up configuration PGL or VGL or PPI program Manufacturer Type Model WSCSTCONT132 Workstation Customizing Object QWPDEFAULT Library QSYS This selects a generic object that passes the data unchanged without any escape codes to the printer Text files will print in the currently selected printer configuration cpi Ipi and form length OS 400 versions below V3R7 may not have this selection and may require manual creation of a generic WSCST Please contact Printronix Technical Support for assistance For occasional text reports create a printer configuration for each report and use the Job Select key to select a report configuration 239 Chapter 10 Verify Printing On AS 400 Troubleshooting This installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required In addition you can also ping and telnet to the NIC adapter Print an E net Test Page to verify the Ethernet settings P5000 T5000e SL5000e T4000 DIAGNOSTICS gt Printer Tests gt E Net Test Page gt Enter P7000 T5000r SL5000r DIAGNOSTICS gt Printer Tests gt Ethernet Test gt Enter L55xx L1524 DIAGNOSTICS gt Test Pattern gt E Net Test Page gt Enter The default NIC queue name is d1prn however the name can be changed Substitute the changed name for the RMTPRTQ parameter To verify the queue n
32. Gg 174593_a D H 74204 75000 Unzipped El 74204 C PGL_CGL a T5000 C CT_IGP C CT_IPDS_IGP C CT_PPIM_PGL CI CT_PPH_VGL fe GP C PPI_PGL CJ PPI YGL C TCP_IPDS_IGP CI TN_IGP Figure 42 Navigating to the Appropriate Emulation File on the CD 352 IMPORTANT Downloading Software Through The Network Interface Card NIC 7 Using Windows Explorer navigate to the appropriate file on the CD using the Unzipped directory based on the printer type and desired emulation e g Unzipped T5000 gt IGP See Figure 42 You must use the Unzipped directory since this contains the uncompressed files necessary for NIC download 8 Make note of the file name which is a six digit number plus Prg e g 1238456 prg This is the file you will download into the NIC Copy the file to the download directory Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt Start the FTP protocol by typing ftp xxx xxx xxx xxx lt Enter gt where Xxx xxx xxx xxx represents the IP Address of the printer Log in to the printer by typing root lt Enter gt You are given a password prompt NOTE The default is no password If the FTP program requires a 14 15 password contact your system administrator At the password prompt press lt Enter gt Once logged in t
33. If dest1 default is disabled and upon verification the printer name supplied by the LPR protocol and the destination name do not match then an error message is returned and the service is refused If dest1default is enabled and upon verification the printer name supplied by the LPR protocol and the destination name do not match then the job is automatically routed to the first destination and the service is accepted Default enabled store pserver from default Set all general print server settings back to factory defaults store pserver from current Store all current general print server settings to flash memory so they are retained after a power cycle This ensures all current settings match what is stored in flash memory store rprinter add lt psname gt lt printer_num gt lt dest gt Example store rprinter add pserverl 0 dlprn Add the RPRINTER settings on the NIC for a Novell environment lt psname gt must be the name of an existing PSERVER NLM on your Novell file server lt printer_num gt is the printer number within this PSERVER NLM lt dest gt is the queue on the NIC where the print jobs will be sent to ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER Store Commands store rprinter del lt psname gt lt printer_num gt Example store rprinter del pserverl 0 Delete the RPRINTER settings on the NIC for a Novell environment lt psname gt must be the name of an existing PSERVER NLM on your Novell file server lt printer_num gt is the p
34. Line Matrix Printers on z OS 224 Line matrix printers can be shared on PSF in one of two ways e By using the MGMTMODE and DISCINTV parameters via the JES spool By port switching on the printer JES Spool Printer Sharing JES spool printer sharing is valid for TCP IP attached network printers A session with the printer is maintained while there is output on the JES spool and the printer is available When there is no more output on the spool and the disconnect interval expires PSF ends the session with the printer PSF attempts to restart the session when there is more work on the spool for the printer After the session is restarted PSF must reload the resources required for the print jobs When using this method of network printer sharing PSF cannot determine if another print driver is active You can request this method of network printer sharing by specifying the following parameters in the PSF Startup Proc MGMTMODE OUTAVAIL FAILURE WCONNECT TIMEOUT REDRIVE DISCINTV n JES Spool Printer Sharing MGMTMODE Set to OUTAVAIL OUTAVAIL requests that PSF start a communications session with the printer only when output is available on the JES spool FAILURE Specifies the action PSF is to take after a printer failure or a TCP IP network failure If FAILURE WCONNECT and the printer is connected to another host when PSF attempts to establish a connection on TCP IP PSF continuously retries up to the limit specif
35. Maximum spooled file size MAXPAGES Number of pages NONE Staring time Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files Ending time for more values Order of files on queue Remote system Remote printer queue Writer to autostart Queue for writer messages Library Connection type Destination type Host print transform Manufacturer type and model Workstation Customizing Object Library Internet address Destination options Print separator page User defined option SEQ RMTSYS RMTPRTQ AUTOSTRWTR MSGQ CNNTYPE DESTTYP TRANSFORM MFRTYPMDL WSCST INTNETADR DESTOPT SEPPAGE USRDFNOPT gt gt FIFO INTNETADR diprn 1 QSYSOPR LIBL IP OTHER YES See Note on page 239 gt See Note on page 239 9 99 57 173 NONE YES NONE Figure 29 Automatic Remote Output Queue Configuration 237 Chapter 10 Configuring The AS 400 For Printing 238 3 Enter values for the following parameters Output Queue OUTQ The name of the AS 400 output queue The name can be anything you would like This name is not the same as the printer internal queue name diprn Remote System RMTSYS Internet address of the NIC on the printer INTNETADR prompts you for this or the hostname of the NIC Remote Printer Queue RMTPRTQ Default name of the network printer Set for any of dlprn through d8prn The remote printer queue name must be lowerc
36. Monitor dialog box opens 106 Windows XP 2000 Host Setup Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor 2 x Port Settings Port Name rw n Printer Name or IP Address rs Protocol Raw LPR gt Raw Settings Por iumber E 00 LPR Settings Queue Name fan pin I LPR Byte Counting Enabled T SNMP Status Enabled Community Name public SHME Device Inder fi 11 Complete the Port Settings tab as desired e Raw The default Make sure Raw is selected in the Protocol field Leave the setting at 9100 the default in the Raw Settings Port Number field e LPR To select the LPR setting click LPR in the Protocol field In lowercase characters type the desired queue name of d1prn through d8prn in the LPR Settings Queue Name field e SNMP Status Enabled Check the SNMP Status Enabled box if you want the status returned using SNMP You must also enter the appropriate information in the Community Name and SNMP Device Index fields Upon completion click OK The Port Settings text box disappears and the Additional Port Information Required text box reappears 107 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration 12 Click Next Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizai x a Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You have selected a port with the following characteristics SNMP No Protocol LPR dipm Device KHH RRK HHH KEK Port Na
37. NETWORK PRINTER Where printer _type e g T5000 P5000 L5520 is the model of your printer Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R7 And Above NOTE Only use the USRDFNOBJ parameter if it was defined in the previous procedure See Configuring AFP With CRTPSFCFG On V3R7 Or V4R1 Optional on page 256 2 Acompleted screen looks like the example shown in Figure 34 Display Device Description 5716SS1 V3R7MO 961108 Device Description Option Category of device Device class Device type Device model LAN attachment User defined object Library Object type Data transform program User defined driver program Advanced function printing Port number Online at IPL Font Identifier Point size Form feed BLDRB1 DEVD OPTION DEVCLS TYPE MODEL LANATTACH USRDFNOBJ USRDTATFM USRDRVPGM AFP PORT ONLINE FONT FORMFEED printer type ALL PRT LAN IPDS 0 IP printer type NETPRT AFP PSFCFG NONE NONE YES 5001 YES 011 NONE CONT 259 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer Separator drawer Separator program Library Printer error message Message queue Library Activation timer Maximum pending requests Print while converting Print request timer Form definition Library Remote location Name or address Dependent location name Text User defined options SEPDRAWER SEPPGM PRTERRMSG MSGQ A
38. NWAdmn3 lt x is only included with Netware 4 11 and higher releases If you are using Netware 4 10 you can either upgrade to Netware 4 11 or go to Novell s Web site and get the patches to upgrade the Nwadmin program for Netware 4 10 to Nwadmn8x for Netware 4 11 Alternatively you can perform the setup without using MPAdmin NDS PSERVER Setup Netware 4 x 5 x NDS PSERVER Setup Netware 4 x 5 x There are a number of ways to configure the NIC for use in a Novell NDS PSERVER setup These include using the MPAdmin snap in for Netware Administrator using generic print server objects in Netware Administrator or by using PCONSOLE The following steps describe a setup using a generic print server object in Netware Administrator Setups using PCONSOLE are less common and will not be discussed To create a printer print queue in an NDS environment using Netware Administrator print server objects 1 Login to Netware Administrator as a user with security equal to Admin on your Novell host 2 Click the right mouse button on a branch in the tree in which you would like to create a print queue object 3 Select Create from the pop up menu The New Object dialogue displays 4 Select Print Queue from the Class of new object list and click OK 5 Select Directory Service Queue and type the name of the queue into the Print Queue name field 6 Fill in the Print Queue Volume field by typing in a volume or browsing for one Click C
39. NetSpool LU name LU classes extend Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E The following panel shows the Allocation section of the setup where the printer is associated with Class K jobs Browse Allocation Command gt Printer definition name VTAM_DSE1 More Spool allocation values CLASS K LINECT DEST PRMODE JES node PRTY FCB SEGMENT FLASH count THRESHLD FLASH name UCS FORMS WRITER GROUPID USERDATA sek extend BURST 1 Yes 2 No HOLD 1 Yes 2 No OUTDISP 1 Purge 2 Leave 3 Keep 4 Hold 5 Write Values for Separator Pages Address f extend Building In the IP Printway options retry time retry limit and response timeout is already for the printer NOTE The values of these settings are account specific Other values may best serve your printing environment 285 Chapter 12 Program Materials Browse IP PrintWay Options Command gt Printer definition name VTAM_DSE1 More Retention period Successful Failure Retry time 0000 05 00 Retry limit 2 Connection timeout 30 Response timeout 100 Exits Begin data set End data set Record Document header extend Translate document header Document trailer extend Translate document trailer Dataset grouping 2 1 None 2 Job 3 Concatenate job Formatting Line termination 286
40. Network AS 400 Version Printer Sharing Parameters To set up AS 400 for printer sharing set the following parameters Where Set Table 11 Printer Sharing Parameter Recommended Value Description V3R2 CRTPSFCFG CHGPSFCFG RLSTMR NORDYF Specifies the point at which the release timer RLSTMR is activated Set to NORDYF This means that the release timer is activated when there are no spooled files in the printer s output queue with a status of RDY and the last page of the last spooled file processed has printed NORDYF is used so that all files with a status of RDY are printed before releasing the session which does not terminate the writer V3R2 270 CRTPSFCFG CHGPSFCFG ACTRLSTMR SEC15 Specifies the amount of time to wait before a session or dialog is released without terminating the writer The ACTRLSTMR parameter specifies when this timer is to be activated Set the parameter to a value at least equal to the TIMEOUT value on the printer The recommended value is SEC15 Table 11 Printer Sharing continued Printer Sharing Parameters AS 400 Version Where Set Parameter Recommended Value Description V3R2 CRTPSFCFG CHGPSFCFG ACTTMR NOMAX The value specifies the number of seconds that PSF 400 will wait for a printer to respond to an activation request If only one system will be using the printer use
41. Paper Tray Paper Jam at Entrance Cutsheet Cover Open Cutsheet Paper Empty Tray Mismatch 81 Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration Table 8 Alert Groups and Printer Events Alert Group Printer Events Media Output Stacker Full Stacker Jam Time Out Stacker Full Time Out Stacker Fault Time Out Stacker Jam Stacker Fault Stack Over Flow Stack Under Flow Stacker Fail Stacker Interlock Fail Stacker Not Ready Media Path Clear Paper Jam Paper Jam Time Out Paper Jam Fuser Paper Jam Exit Cutsheet Path Open Paper Jam at Drum Paper Jam at Fuser Paper Jam at Exit Tractor MTR FWD Speed Error Tracker MTR BKWD Speed Error Paper Jam at Entrance Cutsheet Motor Fail Cutsheet Feeder Fail Clear Jam at Fuser Input Clear Jam at Fuser Exit Clear Jam Near TOF Lever 82 SNMP Configuration Table 8 Alert Groups and Printer Events Alert Group Printer Events Marker Ribbon Stall Time Out Ribbon Ink Out Ribbon Stall Ribbon Drive Shuttle Over Speed Ribbon Fault Ribbon Detected Print Head Up Ribbon Broken Ribbon Load Bad Ribbon Take up Full 2A Toner Empty Add Toner Install Toner Cup Cutter Cutter Fault Cutter Fail Barcode Barcode Fail Specification Barcode Quiet Zone Too Small Barcode Improper Data Format Scanner Unscannable Check Media Poor Scanning Check Head and Heat Poor Scanning Inspect Head Poor Scanning Check Media Contrast Too Low Check M
42. Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E Browse IP PrintWay Options Command gt Printer definition name VTAM_DSE1 More Document header extend Translate document header Document trailer extend Translate document trailer Dataset grouping 2 1 None 2 Job 3 Concatenate job Formatting Line termination Transparent data char 35 Carriage control type 2 1 None 2 Machine 3 ANSI Delete form feed 4 1 None 2 Leading 3 Trailing 4 Both Formatting 1 None 2 Standard 3 Translate only 4 Use FCB PostScript header 1 Add 2 Ignore 3 Landscape 4 Always landscape Omit line termination at EOF 287 Chapter 12 Program Materials The following shows where the VTAM parameters were set for the printer For the DSE printer we chose RMT3 and the logmode of LU3PRT Browse VTAM Protocol Command gt Printer definition name VTAM_DSE1 Printer LU name RMT3 VTAM Processing Options Printer logmode LUS3PRT Checkpoint pages 5 Send as transparent data The next panel shows these settings for the SCS printer Browse VTAM Protocol Command gt Printer definition name VTAM_SCS1 Printer LU name RMT2 VTAM Processing Options Printer logmode SCS Checkpoint pages 5 Send as transparent data 288 Configuration Screens The last thing you need to configure is the printer NOTE A this time InfoPrint Se
43. Printing AIX 147 ASCII 234 configuration AS 400 234 direct socket 148 FTP 147 troubleshooting 150 verification AS 400 240 Printronix Printing System PPS Host setup 117 Problem AS 400 ASCII HTTP 244 AS 400 ASCII Web browser 244 Program materials TN3270E 276 Protocol Novell Network 62 PSERVER setup NetWare Version 4 x 163 NetWare Version 5 x 163 troubleshooting 194 Pserver setup NetWare Version 3 x 158 Pserver Novell Network 63 PSF for IPDS on V4R2 and above configuring 261 PSF 400 for IPDS on V3R2 configuring 250 PSF 400 for IPDS on V3R7 and above configuring 256 Q Queues models 21 NIC 21 371 Index R RARP Unix 130 Reference a Bindery queue in NDS NetWare 3 x 188 NetWare 4 x 188 NetWare 5 x 188 Remote management software 304 Remote shell 54 Remove preferred file server 174 Resource Name TN5250 3270 75 Root user NIC 343 Routers Unix 132 Routing TCP IP Network 58 RPRINTER setup NetWare Version 3 x 160 NetWare Version 4 x 166 Netware Version 5 x 166 Rprinter Novell Network 64 RPRINTER NPRINTER setup NetWare 3 x 188 NetWare 4 x 188 NetWare 5 x 188 Run mode 25 S SCO setup 136 SCS file printing 245 Security configuration 89 Kerberos 89 Security NIC 343 Selected Log Path Print Path 67 Selected Model Print Path 66 372 Service Type Novell Network 63 Services Print Path 65 Set commands 322 Shell command 305 SNMP
44. Remember to repower the NIC to make the settings take effect Downloading Software Through The Network Interface Card NIC 1 Make a printout of all saved configurations Installing new software erases all saved configurations You will use the printouts to restore the printer configurations Set the printer power switch to O Off On the printer panel press and hold down the appropriate keys for your particular printer model as described below Printer Series Models Key Combination P7000 ONLINE PAPER ADVANCE P5000 ONLINE PAPER ADVANCE T4000 PAUSE FEED T5000 ee L1524 ONLINE PAGE EJECT L5000 ONLINE CLEAR 351 Chapter 16 Downloading Software Through The Network Interface Card NIC Without releasing the keys power the printer on and continue holding the keys down until you see TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT on the LCD You may then release the keys 4 Wait until you see WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take up to 30 seconds to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer 5 Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive 6 Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer Folders x 359724 prg A Desktop a E My Computer i 3 Floppy 4 a g C C download H I Program Files C Recycler H Temp fs winnt
45. To share the printer on the network verify that the necessary parameters have been set correctly See Sharing The AS 400 Printer On The Network on page 269 If you have problems refer to AS 400 Troubleshooting on page 273 247 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer Configuring An AS 400 TCP IP Interface With ADDTCPIFC NOTE Do not enter the IP address of the NIC Do not set the AS 400 interface address to the same address as the NIC IP address Also do not add the NIC to the AS 400 TCP IP interface list Configuring An Interface For Ethernet ADDTCPIFC is used to add a TCP IP interface to AS 400 This step configures the AS 400 for attachments to a TCP IP network 1 At the AS 400 command line enter the following command ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR 9 99 15 188 LIND ETHLAN SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 2 Your completed screen should look like Figure 30 System BLDD60 Internet address 9 99 15 188 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Line description ETHLAN Line type ELAN Interface status Inactive Type of service NORMAL Maximum transmission unit LIND Automatic start YES Figure 30 Example ADDTCPIFC Interface 3 The following parameters must be specified a Internet Address Internet address of the AS 400 Ethernet LAN adapter NOTE Do not use the IP address of the NIC 248 Configuring An AS 400 TCP IP Interface With ADDTCPIFC b Subnet Mask The Su
46. Use Novelle Printer Gateway when setting up the NDPS printer agent Select NONE for Novell PDS 4 Select Remote LPR on IP for Port Handler then enter the hostname ipaddress and printer name dlprn d8sprn_ by default in the next dialog NOTE When the IPDS feature is installed queue name d4prn is not available NDPS Configuration Netware 4 11 And Above 5 Select no driver in the Select Printer Drivers dialog unless you have a driver installed into the Broker s RMS which is to be used with the printer Setup Using RPRINTER Mode In this mode an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS client then forwards these jobs to a printer using the RPRINTER IPX protocol 1 The printer must first be set up to function in RPRINTER mode selecting any desired Print Server Name and Printer Number Use Novell Printer Gateway when setting up the NDPS printer agent Select NONE for Novell PDS Select Remote rprinter on IPX for Port Handler Enter the Print Server Name and Printer Number from step 1 for the SAP Name Select no drivers in the Select Printer Drivers dialog unless you have a driver installed into the Broker s RMS which is to be used with the printer The printer will need to be rebooted to attach to the NDPS printer agent in this mode 193 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 194 PSERVER Setup If you cannot get a connection with the NIC a
47. WLAN ADAPTER Under all versions of NetWare both PSERVER and RPRINTER setups are supported by the NIC Since a PSERVER setup is the most common you will find the necessary steps to configure the NIC as a PSERVER shown first Configuration for RPRINTER and NPRINTER setup follow the PSERVER information NOTE The NIC can service up to four printers on one file server It cannot service multiple file servers at one time NetWare Version 3 x PSERVER Setup To configure a print queue on a NetWare 3 x network 1 Log on to the Novell file server as supervisor 2 Enter PCONSOLE 3 Select Print Queue Information from the PCONSOLE Main Menu 4 Click INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues showing 5 Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER This can be any name you would like Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu N Select Print Server Information and press ENTER 8 Click INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 NetWare Version 3 x PSERVER Setup Type the name of the NIC when prompted for a print server name and press ENTER when done The default is M_xxxxxx or M302_xxxxx for the Wireless Adapter where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the NIC address found on the configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet Parameters MAC address e g M_091C1A or M302_0
48. WLAN PrintNet Enterprise Default This will reboot the WLAN PrintNet Enterprise with factory default settings Figure 20 System Configuration The System Configuration form allows you to change the NIC s operation mode Select Reboot to re power the print server Select Default to reset the print server and have it come up with factory default settings Security Configuration WLAN The Security Configuration form allows you to configure the NIC s ADAPTER Kerberos authentication settings and to obtain the authenticated WLAN information Kerberos Configuration This section covers the configuration of Kerberos related settings The two configuration settings include e Print Server Settings Used to configure Kerberos settings related to the Print Server e Key Distribution Center KDC Settings Used to configure the Kerberos settings related to the Kerberos server 89 90 Chapter 3 Security Configuration Print Server Settings Print Server Name The Print Server name is used in the KDC database and can be configured in the Administration page If this name is changed the corresponding name in the KDC database must be changed accordingly to match it Default lt prod gt _xxxxxx where xxxxxx is the serial number or the last six digits of the network adapters Ethernet address lt prod gt is the product model number e g M302_01234 Renew Lifetime The maximum time allowed be
49. Windows environment this is the Windows 2000 user password for the Print Server and they must be exactly the same store pping opts Jenable Example store pping opts enable Store the state of periodic ping flag If the periodic ping flag is enabled the NIC periodic ping client will attempt to ping its default gateway on its active NIC interfaces Default disabled Store Commands store pping packet lt number of packets gt Example store pping packet 1 Store the value of the packet It is the number of ICMP Echo Request packets that will be sent by the periodic ping client on each period Default 1 store pping period lt minutes gt Example store pping period 5 Store the value of the period lt minutes gt is the amount of time from 1 to 5 minutes defines the periodic ping sequence will be repeated Default 5 store pping from default Example store pping from default Store all the periodic ping default settings to flash memory so taht they are retained after power up store pserver name Example store pserver name NIC1234 Command to change the print server name store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout lt seconds gt jobcontrol off standard enhanced Example store pserver opts jobcontrol If jobcontrol is disabled then the need for start of job end of job flow control with the printer is determined by the printer Job flow control is used for jobs requiring backchannel responses such as IP
50. Wireless NIC place SWITCH 1 in the up position 6 From a workstation attached to this network segment create an ARP entry The NIC IP address and hardware or MAC address are needed At the workstation enter arp s lt ipaddress gt lt MACaddress gt ping lt ipaddress gt 7 Try to ping this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network If the interface does not respond verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was created 8 Telnet into the NIC using the same IP address as above Log in as root with no password 153 Chapter 5 Unix Troubleshooting Tips ETHERNET 154 WLAN 9 Atthe system prompt enter store tcpip from default config http on reset NOTE This will reset all TCP IP settings to factory default and reset the NIC 10 Power the printer off and then back on 11 Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway parameters to the desired values To reset all Integrated NIC TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible contact your Printronix service representative for assistance 12 If the Web browser access does not work telnet into the NIC as root Enter the following command config http on If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance Front Panel Message Dynamically Set Params Read Only This is not an error It is an
51. address and subnet mask before it can be seen on the network Optional Additional settings like routing entries can be configured This allows communication across subnets when no other router exists You can configure the NIC done from the printer control panel Web browser host commands or other Printronix utility software To configure these options see Configuration Tools on page 34 Configuration Using ARP To configure the NIC with its IP settings using a manual arp command 1 Log on to a Windows station with TCP IP loaded and located on the same subnet as the NIC 2 Find the Ethernet address for the NIC on the configuration printout It must be entered as part of this procedure Configuration Using ARP Use the arp command to add an entry into the Windows station ARP table for the NIC This is the most common syntax for this command Syntax arp s ipaddress ethernetaddress Example for Microsoft TCP stacks arp s 192 75 11 9 00 80 72 07 00 60 This example specifies a NIC using IP address 192 75 11 9 and Ethernet address 00 80 72 07 00 60 Check if the ARP entry was accepted arp a You should see an entry in the listed ARP table with the IP address and Ethernet address specified in Step 3 Ping this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network At this point you should be able to communicate with the NIC from your local Windows station This means the print server knows a
52. address to the SNMP alert table lt index gt is the index number of the SNMP trap manager table The emailaddress is the desired e mail address of the form user domain com 329 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 330 set snmp emailformat lt index gt short Enable or disable the short e mail message format for an SNMP alert table entry When enabled the short e mail format can be used when messages will be viewed on devices having a limited display size a cellular phone or pager for example lt index gt is the index number of the SNMP alert table short enables the short e mail format short disables it set snmp shortmsglen lt index gt lt length gt Specify the length of the short e mail message format for an SNMP alert table entry This command is effective only when the short e mail message format for an SNMP alert table entry is enabled lt index gt is the index number of the SNMP alert table length specifies the length of the short e mail message and has an acceptable range of 15 to 80 characters set snmp email lt index gt active Enable or disable sending e mail alert messages for an SNMP alert table entry lt index gt is the index number of the SNMP alert table active enables sending e mail alert mesages active disables it set snmp alerts lt index gt all warning offline mediainput mediaoutput mediapath marker cutter
53. are retained after a power cycle This ensures all current settings match what is stored in flash memory store ifc default lt ifnum gt lt 0 gt 0 for no default Store the specified interface as the default interface The other interface is no longer active after power cycle The 0 allows for both interfaces to be active store ifc lt ifnum gt mode auto 10half 10full 100halt 100full Store the specified interface mode as automatic 10mbps half duplex 10mbps full duplex 100mbps half duplex 100mbps full duplex See page 29 307 Chapter 15 Complete Command List WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN 308 Defines the authentication scheme store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan auth lt auth method gt eg open shared leap kerb e Open system authentication allows all devices that have the authentication algorithm number for open system to authenticate e Shared key authentication involves a four step process using secure or encrypted text by means of WEP e Leap is to enable disable LEAP operation e Kerb is for Kerberos Define a auth user name to be used in the LEAP operation store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan user lt auth user name gt This auth user name needs to match the user name entered in the LEAP Access Point Define a auth password to be used in the LEAP operation store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan pass lt aut
54. at which continued configuration is required Developing Line Descriptions With CRTLINETH For each LAN adapter on the AS 400 a line description needs to be created for the NIC This is required for Release V3R2 and V3R7 If a line description already exists make sure the SSAP list includes default options AA and 12 You must also know the LAN speed for the AS 400 LAN adapter NOTE To change a line description you need to vary the line off before making the change After making the change you need to vary the line back on To change an existing line description use the CHGLINETH command To create a line description use CRTLINETH 229 Chapter 10 Overview NOTE SSAPS of AA and 12 are automatically set as default values in the line description when CALC is used in creating new line descriptions You do not need to set these values unless they have been changed To create a line description enter the following command CRTLINETH LIND ETHLAN RSRCNAME LIN041 Your completed screen should look like Figure 26 5763SS1 V3R2M0 960517 BLDD60 09 11 96 12 25 46 Line description Option Category of line OPTION ETHLAN ALL ELAN 230 Resource name Online at IPL Vary on wait Local adapter address Exchange identifier Ethernet standard Maximum controllers Error threshold level RSRCNAME LINO41 ONLINE YES VRYWAIT NOWAIT ADPTADR ADPT EXCHID 056A1005 ETHSTD ALL MA
55. authentication for use when a Symbol RF card is installed e LEAP Selects LEAP authentication for use with a Cisco RF card installed LEAP Username e LEAP Username 01 15 The first 15 characters of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 e LEAP Username 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 e LEAP User 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 Reset LEAP User Resets the LEAP user name to an empty string LEAP Password e LEAP Password 01 15 The first 15 characters of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 e LEAP Password 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 e LEAP Password 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP password maximum number of characters is 32 Reset LEAP Pswd Resets the LEAP password to an empty string 45 46 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools Kerberos Parameters Kerberos Enable e Enable Enable Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface e Disable default Disable Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface Kerb Pwd 01 15 First 15 characters of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Kerb Pwd 16 30 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum numer of characters is 40 Kerb Pwd 31 40 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos
56. by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct or indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice Copyright 2005 Printronix Inc All rights reserved Trademark Acknowledgements Portions of this manual used by permission of Wyndham Technologies Inc Copyright 1991 1999 Wyndham Technologies Inc IGP LinePrinter Plus PGL Network Interface Card and Printronix are registered trademarks of Printronix Inc AIX AS 400 NetView and OS 2 are registered trademarks and AFP Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS Print Services Facility and PSF are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Netscape Netscape Navigator and the Netscape Communications logo are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc Unix is a registered trademark of X Open Company Limited Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows 95 Windo
57. c ccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeees 64 Current Model Settings ccceececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 Current Log Path SettingS 0 cccccseseeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeeees 67 Print Model Configuration 0 cccccccscceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeetees 68 Log Path Configuration cccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeeteneeeees 71 TN5250 3270 Configuration ccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeeeees 73 SNMP Configuration 0 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeceeseaeeseneeeeeeeees 77 Administration Configuration cccccccsceeeseeeeeeseeeeseneeeeees 85 System Information 0 ccccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeseeeeeseneeeenaees 85 PaSSWOldS fen nia cacy cer en ie ieee ee die ee 88 System Configuration c cceceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeteneeeee 89 Security Configuration c cccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeseneeteneeeeeeeess 89 Kerberos Configuration ccccccceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeneees 89 Credentials Information 0 ccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeteaes 91 Stat S aeeie een inest i e enak AAEE ned oE ra ta e aTa aeaa 91 Stat s I O PORE ni ia aeea aaa aaea tiie Eaa 91 Stat s NeW O a n a 92 Table of Contents 4 Windows Configuration essees 93 OVEVICW 2 02 oasis dotnet ai Gawain 93 Windows Environment Description 93 Windows NIC Configuration s s s 94 Mandatory wisest adie R A RA 94 oa PEE EAE A EE A wae atari 94 Configuration Using ARP essseeseseseeeseerrrer
58. configuration menu information Power off the printer On the Adapter or Wireless NIC place SWITCH 1 in the down position Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state On the Adapter or Wireless NIC place SWITCH 1 in the up position TCP IP Access Problem 6 From a workstation attached to this network segment create an ARP entry The NIC IP address and hardware or MAC address are needed At the workstation enter arp s lt ipaddress gt lt MACaddress gt ping lt ipaddress gt 7 Try to ping this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network If the interface does not respond verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was created 8 Telnet into the NIC using the same IP address as above Log in as root with no password 9 Atthe system prompt enter store tcpip from default config http on reset NOTE This will reset all TCP IP settings to factory default and reset the NIC 10 Power the printer off and then back on 11 Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway parameters to the desired values 12 If Web browser access does not work telnet into the NIC as root Enter the following command config http on If you still experience difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance 209 Chapter 8 OS 2 Workstation Configuration 210 9 Overview z OS Configuration IPDS Printer
59. d5prn PRN d6prn PRN d7prn PRN d8prn PRN 98 Changing Destination Names This name can be changed to something more meaningful using the built in HTML forms To do this 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http NICIPaddress destConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default At the Print Path Configuration HTML form that displays select a destination link from the top of the page to bring up the appropriate destination form By default you should see a line near the top of the form showing the destinations listed in Table 9 Once the desired destination HTML form displays highlight the Name field and type in the new name for this destination Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new setting take effect 99 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration Windows Host Configuration This section covers Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows Millennium Windows 95 98 Windows 3 1 and Printronix Printing System PPS new printer setups Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup This installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required In addition the administrator can ping an
60. each model are as follows 1 Insert carriage return after line feed Insert a banner page before or after each print job 3 Insert header strings to e Print using upper tray s paper e Printer using lower tray s paper e Print in landscape mode e Print in portrait mode 4 Insert trailer strings to e Reset the printer once the print job completes e Force the end of the job e Perform a form feed at the end of the data 21 22 Chapter 1 Logical Printer Architecture Log one or all of the following information as each print job passes through the model e Job ID and username e User ID and three messages per job about the start and finish e Checksum value of the data transferred e Miscellaneous messages from the printer e Status of the printer based on the port interface signals Load a specific printer configuration before processing a print job e Specify a printer configuration to be associated with a print queue e When a job is set to that print queue the associated printer configuration will be loaded before the job is processed e Feature allows you to define up to eight unique and independent printer personalities in a single printer e Allows you to effectively have eight different printers in one Interfaces Interfaces The NIC interfaces with your printer through an Ethernet 10 100Base T interface connector Two NIC interfaces are available depending on the type of controller board the printer con
61. form that displays scroll down to the Passwords section 4 Click within the Old field beside the Root Password heading and enter the existing root password By default there is no root password so you can go to the next step without typing anything in this field 5 Within the Root Password section click within the New field and enter the new root password 6 Within the Root Password section click within the Confirm field and enter the new root password again Remember this is case sensitive 7 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new setting take effect From this point on anytime you log in to the NIC as root you will need to specify this password or your login attempt will fail NOTE To clear this password or change it use the same Administration Configuration HTML form Just enter the appropriate Old password and put in the new one or nothing if you do not want a root password any longer The commands directly on the NIC are set user from default save Reset The NIC Password Reset The NIC Password Occassionally a user will set a root user password on the NIC adapter and then forget it This is the procedure to reset the root password back to the default no password IMPORTANT _ First determine the number of dip switches on the back of the adapter and the NIC version from the printer configuration
62. from a workstation but you cannot Web browse Telnet or print to the printer through the NIC there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list In order for this workstation to use the NIC in this case one of two things must happen e the TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this workstation or e all entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations hosts access to the above TCP services To view the current access list use the printer control panel to access the configuration menu see the User s Manual for configuration menu information From the DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests menu choose the E Net Test Page When the page prints look under the TCP Access Table section for the TCP access list entries ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER TCP IP Access Problem To add delete a TCP access list entry refer to TCP Access Lists on page 347 NOTE When the following procedure is used the TCP access list will be cleared but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is complete To reset all Adapter or Wireless NIC TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible 1 Obtain a configuration printout using the control panel See the User s Manual for configuration menu information 2 Power off the printer 3 On the Adapter or Wireless NIC place SWITCH 1 in the down position 4 Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state 5 On the Adapter or
63. gt WSCST1lib lt WSCSTlib gt store tn dest lt dxprn gt from default store tn dest lt dxprn gt autoconnect 295 Chapter 13 Using Telnet Commands for TN5250 296 store tn dest lt dxprn gt copytimeout lt copytimeoutvalue gt See page 307 for store command descriptions List Commands list tn list stored tn list default tn See page 335 for list command descriptions TN5250 Auto Connect Command tn dest lt dxprn gt start stop See page 342 for a detailed description Getting Started Set the following items when first configuring the NIC for use with an AS 400 running TN5250 e The IP address of the AS 400 you are planning to use Example store tn dest d1prn as400 192 75 11 1 e The device description or queue name you want built on the AS 400 for the printer This must be unique to the printer Example store tn dest d1prn devicedesc MOCHA3812 e Enable the printer to autmatically connect to the AS 400 when it is first powered up or automatically reconnect if the original connection is lost Example store tn dest d1prn autoconnect In most circumstances all other settings can be left as default The printer should be reset powered off and on again for the settings to take effect If you do not wish the printer to connect automatically when powered up then leave the autoconnect disabled and control the connection manually with the following command TN5250 Job Formatting Example tn dest diprn
64. host as supervisor 2 Select Print Server Information from the main menu 3 Select the appropriate printer and press ENTER 4 Select Change Password 5 Atthe prompts type and retype the new password Press ENTER when you are finished 6 Proceed to the next section to store the password on the NIC 175 Chapter 7 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T 176 Print Server Setup HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and add the new password to the Pserver Password field NOTE The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must match the password set on the unit 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Print Server Setup Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell passwd password
65. immediately Once the E NET READY message displays you may enter the Gateway Address by repeating front panel steps 6 and 7 above This will ensure the correct Netmask becomes associated with the Gateway value you enter From the front panel navigate to the Gateway Address and enter the appropriate value You must press ENTER after inputting each segment of the Gateway Address Put the printer online and wait for the E NET READY message to display on the front panel 10 Enable the Power Saver mode if desired NOTE When the printer is moved from one network to another the software cannot find the printer To solve this problem reset the NIC using the dip switches on the back of the NIC After resetting the NIC the software can find the printer and the IP address can also be set in the NIC See Table 7 on page 28 NIC Verification NIC Verification Before performing the verification you must connect the NIC card to the network 1 Print an E NET test page following the steps on page 34 to verify the settings you made Verify the Netmask is correct in two locations on the E NET test page e NETWORK INTERFACES e TCP IP ROUTING TABLE The Netmask must be the same in both locations For example if the Netmask is listed as 255 255 255 0 in NETWORK INTERFACES and is listed as 255 255 255 255 in the TCP IP ROUTING TABLE they do not match and you must correct it for the Gateway Also if a Gateway Address
66. information typed in the previous screen is correct you can ignore this message Click OK to continue or click Cancel to return to the previous screen and verify settings j Cancel 125 Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips 126 The Ethernet cable is not plugged in or the printer is not turned on This message is a communication failure between the NT 2000 server and the NIC Check cabling IP address settings gateway etc Test page does not print or prints incorrectly 1 Is the printer online Re send test page 2 The print queue name in step 6 on page 101 should be d1prn however the name can be changed To verify the queue names print an E Net Test Page Refer to your User s Manual for information 3 The Printronix NT print driver requires P Series emulation active on the printer The Generic Text driver should print in any printer emulation 4 Delete then re install the Microsoft TCP IP Print service on the server If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance 5 Unix Configuration Overview This chapter details a complete Unix setup including e Configuring the NIC with its mandatory TCP IP settings e g IP address and subnet mask e Configuring the Unix host station with a new printer Unix Environment Description The NIC supports network printing under various TCP IP environments including al
67. informational message warning that the IP address has been dynamically set by either dhcp rarp or bootp To assign a static IP address turn off the rarp bootp and dhcp on the adapter Use the following procedure 1 Telnet to the adapter Login root password Enter key Telnet commands are store tcpip 1 opts rarp bootp dhcp save reset Wait two minutes for the adapter to reset 2 Program the IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway if required from the front panel 6 Novell Configuration Overview ADAPTER This chapter applies to the Adapter and WLAN Adapter NIC and WLAN details a complete Novell setup including ADAPTER e Identifying the NIC on the network e Configuring the NIC with its mandatory print setup settings e Configuring a new print queue on the file server For information about additional options available with the 10 100 Base T interface see Novell Configuration For 10 100Base T Interfaces on page 171 Novell Environment Description The NIC supports network printing under Novell environments by using IPX It supports all 3 x versions of NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x is supported under bindery emulation only 155 Chapter 6 Novell NIC Configuration Novell NIC Configuration ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER 156 Mandatory Under all Novell environments the NIC does not require any network settings to make it visible on the network Simply plug it in to your network and pow
68. install or delete remote printing i d q SCO Setup Type i to install and press Enter or Return The additional prompts display Remote printing configuration Do you want to install or delete remote printing i d q i Installing Remote Line Printing Remote line printing working directory already exists Now type y and press Enter or Return y allows you to configure an LPD printer Type n and press Enter or Return n will exit Run rlpconf as root user The following prompts display Remote printing configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote printing requests Please enter the printer name q to quit 137 Chapter 5 SCO Setup 138 Type in the name you wish to call this printer within SCO and press Enter or Return The following prompt displays Remote printing configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote printing requests Please enter the printer name q to quit diprn Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer r l Type r for a remote printer and press Enter or Return The following prompt displays Remote printing configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote printing requests Please enter the printer name q to quit diprn Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer r l r Please enter the name of the remote host that diprn is at
69. length long short or default lt sleep time gt indicates the power save sleep time in milliseconds If power save is disabled time is set to zero normal power save off displayd lt key num gt is the number identifying one of the four encryption keys starting from one Encryption is disabled if Encryption disabled displayd lt auth method gt is the authentication method e g open shared kerb leap 336 List Commands lt auth user name gt is the authentication method user name lt auth password gt is the authentication method password lt power gt is a percentage indicating the approximate fraction of full power lt option list gt is a list of options that are enabled disabled options are not shown lt status gt is the current access point association status disassociated or associated with lt MAC address gt lt comms quality gt indicates the strength or quality in percent of the wireless signal NOTE The list stored ifc command does not display the Status or Quality lines list kerberos For Wireless NIC with Symbol RF cards only list key List the license details and license key number list logins List any active user logins on the NIC list logpath logpath List the current logpath settings e g names and mapped destinations list model model List the current model settings e g names and mapped destinations With no model para
70. none Example set model m3 stty onlcr Control extra job processing done by the lt model gt The processing options are onlcr Carriage return insertion for Unix text jobs Adds carriage returns to text jobs with solitary linefeeds This will prevent stair stepped output or output running off the right side of the page descramble Automatic descrambling of print jobs passing through which have been scrambled using Printronix proprietary Unix scramble utility npscramble xtab Tab expansion from 1 to 16 spaces set model lt model gt header lt string gt Example set model m1 header 0x20 Set a header string to be sent to the printer at the start of any print jobs passing through this lt model gt The headerstring lt string gt can consist of up to nine elements An example element is a hexadecimal code e g 0x04 or a pre defined variable on the print server e g FF for a formfeed Use list var to see all available variables To erase the header send the command with no headerstring value for example set model m1 header set model lt model gt trailer lt string gt Example set model m7 trailer FF Set a trailer string to be sent to the printer at the end of any print jobs passing through this lt model gt The trailerstring lt string gt can consist of up to nine elements An example element is a hexadecimal code e g 0x04 or a pre defined variable on the print server e g FF for a formfe
71. of the 4 x or 5 x box e g M_03092B After creating the bindery PrintServer on the 4 x or 5 x server reboot NIC and use the debug Novell pserver command via a Telnet or npsh session or print out the E NET Test Page to make sure there is a successful server login Using either PCONSOLE in NDS mode or NWADMIN a Create an NDS queue any name you want or simply use an existing one b Create a print server to use any valid name or choose one already in existence c Create a printer object to use with the print server object you chose or created and attach it to the chosen queue NOTE The 4 xor 5 x queue name print server name and printer object do not have to match any NIC name multiple printers can be defined but only one print server can be attached to Example NDS queue name Finance NDS print server name Fin_Q NDS printer name Fin_Prt_1 NDS printer name Accounting_Prt_1 NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x RPRINTER Setup 3 Ata 4 xor5 x console session if a pserver nim session is already running for Fin_Q first unload it then reload it to find the new objects or simply issue load pserver Fin Q If you are successful the print server console screen will show a printer status option In the printer status window note the numbers assigned to the printers you created Assume for our example that one printer previously existed number 0 and we are adding two more whose numbers became 1 and 2 N
72. on the print server 1 Start a Telnet session with the NIC Syntax telnet NICIPaddress 2 Login as root and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default or your password for your home set 3 List the current access list Syntax list tcpip 347 Chapter 16 NIC Security 348 If the list is empty all hosts have access to the NIC services If there are entries in the list only those hosts specified have access to printing and remote command execution To add and delete access list entries the commands are Syntax store tcpip tcp access add del hostIPaddress networkaddress reset where host Paddress is the IP address of a TCP IP host on your network and networkaddress is the address of a subnet on your network Example store tcpip tcp access add 192 75 11 25 store tcpip tcp access add 192 75 12 0 store tcpip tcp access del 192 75 11 25 reset NOTE Although the maximum number of entries in the access list is 10 each entry can refer to a network rather than a specific host This allows all hosts on that specified network and any individual hosts specified in the list to have access Printer And Print Job Monitoring Printer Monitoring And Logging The NIC allows you to monitor printer status and log information through its built in HTML forms command set and logpaths Printer And Print Job Monitoring To view the current status of an I O port on the NIC two method
73. password maximum number of characters is 40 Reset Kerb Pwd Reset Kerberos password to an empty string KDC Port Number KDC Key Distribution Center port number is the 2 byte UDP TCP port used for Kerberos Communication e 88 default e 0 65535 Clock Skew Units e Seconds default e Minutes Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Control Panel Clock Skew SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds SEC or minutes MIN as specified by the Clock Skew Units that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is invalid e Seconds The range is 60 900 and the default is 300 e Minutes The range is 1 15 and the default is 5 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Clock Skew Units will display on the Clock Skew SEC menu For example if you select Minutes the Clock Skew SEC menu name will change to Clock Skew MIN Tckt Life Units Ticket lifetime unit in either seconds minutes hours or days e Seconds default e Minutes e Hours e Days Tckt Life SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds SEC minutes MIN hours HR or days DAY as specified by the Tckt Life Units that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a new one e Seconds The range is 300 259200 and the default is 43200 e Minutes The range is 5 4320 and the default is 720 e Hours The range is 1 72 and the default is 12 e D
74. procedure The value you specify for the PNAME parameter must match the name on the PSF Startup procedure 218 Configuration Procedure Define the Printer to PSF Each TCP IP attached printer must be defined to PSF with a PRINTDEV statement in the PSF startup procedure Figure 25 shows a sample PSFPROC procedure that you can modify to suit your installation The PRINTDEV statement shows the required IPADDR keyword No line matrix printer specific writer procedure is currently supplied You can however copy the APSWPROT sample from the APAR medium and modify it for the line matrix printer NOTE The line matrix printer supports only resident symbol sets PSFPROC PROC POE NETWORK PRINTERS WRITER PROCEDURE iff 01 MODULE NAME PSFPROC if 01 DESCRIPTIVE NAME START PROCEDURE FOR PSF TCP IP ATTACHED NETWORK PRINTERS if 01 NOTES THE FULL NAME OF THE DEFAULT PAGEDEF IS P1A06462 THE FULL NAME OF THE DEFAULT FORMDEF IS F1A10110 THE FULL NAMES OF THE DEFAULT FONTS ARE XOGF10 XOGS10 XOTU10 AND XOGU10 THE FULL NAME OF THE SEPARATOR PAGE PAGEDEF IS P1V06483 THE FULL NAME OF THE SEPARATOR PAGE FONT IS 219 Chapter 9 Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files I XOGT15 if I 01 CHANGE ACTIVITY Ii i END OF SPECIFICATIONS STEPO1EXEC PGM APSPPIEP REGION 4096K SJOBHDR OUTPUT PAGEDEF V06483 JOB SEPARATOR PAGEDEF
75. sent to the named destination lt dest gt are processed according to the options defined in the named model set dest lt dest gt logpath lt logpath gt Example set dest dlprn logpath 14 Associate a logpath with a destination Jobs sent to the named destination lt dest gt are logged according to the settings defined in the named logpath ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER Set Commands set dest lt dest gt service socket 1pd lpsched rprinter pserver netbios f tpd tn Example set dest dlprn service netbios Set the destination lt dest gt to handle only certain print services To add a service specify the service name To disable a service use oy before the name The available services are described in the following table Services socket Direct socket printing via TCP IP Ipd LPR printing with TCP IP including LPR clients on any platform lpsched LP or System V printing with TCP IP rprinter Novell RPRINTER support pserver Novell PSERVER support netbios Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups printing ftpd Printing using the File Transfer Protocol FTP via TCP IP tn Printing using the TN5250 3270 session set dest from default Set all destination settings back to factory defaults set dest from stored Set all current destination settings to the values stored in flash memory 323
76. separate from the printer without the prior written consent of Printronix Inc d You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software Product e You may not transmit the Software Product over a network by telephone or electronically using any means or reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Software f You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or use 3 Transfer You may transfer the Software Product with the printer but only if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the Software Product and printer Limited Software Product Warranty Printronix Inc warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix Inc Printronix Inc does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix Inc in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies 1 THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED Printronix Inc does n
77. set to 1 to correspond to the Access Point s setting Encryption Key Configuration As previously mentioned there are four encryption keys that can be configured through the control panel For each encryption key x where x can be 1 to 4 the following control menu can be used to configure the key WEP Key x Format This is the format of the key It can be set to either ASCII or Hexadecimal e WEP Key x Width This is the number of bits used for encryption This can be set to either 40 Bits or 128 Bits and must match the Access Point s configuration WEP Key x This is the key value If the WEP Key x Width is set to 40 Bits the key values can be entered in the following 5 sub menus BYTE 1 BYTE 5 If the WEP Key x Width is set to 128 Bits the key values can be entered in the following 13 sub menus BYTE 1 BYTE 13 The key values must configure to match the corresponding key in the Access Point s key configuration Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Control Panel LEAP Parameters LEAP is a Cisco wireless security scheme The Cisco LEAP allows for a WEP key timeout that forces re authentication resulting in the derivation of anew WEP key for the session Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface e Open the default Selects open authentication e Shared Selects shared key authentication e Kerberos Selects Kerberos
78. the IP subnet mask and default router on the NIC adapter Use a telnet session or web browser session to configure three items per dest logical NIC queue for use as a logical network connection to the AS 400 NOTE The three values i e 192 168 168 34 represent the AS 400 IP in dotted notation and are the entries for the AS 400 The newly created TN5250 device queue i e pallet form first chair is alpha 10 char max assumes the new name devicedesc Determine whether or not to autoconnect initiate connection on power up or through NIC reset the TN5250 device queue 293 Chapter 13 Setting Up A TN5250 Connection Device Via A Telnet Session NOTE Itis not necessary to set up the devd or queue name on the AS 400 manually or in advance The configuration and reset of the NIC adapter automatically sets up the devd or queue name Setting Up A TN5250 Connection Device Via A Telnet Session 294 In a telnet session the command list TN5250 shows the configured values To set up a TN5250 connection device via a telnet session use the commands store TN5250 and the following NOTE The NIC sessions can be configured either by a web browser or by telnet 1 Use cmd WRKCTLD VWS choice 5 display enter to list the number of virtual devices this controller 2 Use cmd DSPSYSVAL QAUTOVRT Note the number of auto configured virual devices permitted on the system This number must be greater than
79. the card s factory set default channel Set antenna type store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan antenna diverse primary aux lt antenna type gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt antenna type gt is the type of antenna to be used primary aux auxiliary or external and diverse diverse allows the WLAN card to decide on the optimal antenna during operation Set preamble length store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan preamble default long short lt len type gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt len type gt is the type of preamble length required It can be long short or default default allows the card to use its own factory default Set power management mode store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan pmm on loff lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device The string off disables power save mode on enables power save mode with a default sleep time of 100ms 309 Chapter 15 Complete Command List WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN 310 Set transmit power store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan txpwr lt 0 100 gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt 0 100 gt the power level as a percentage of full power Set options store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan opts openauth intn1 lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device An option is enabled by including it in the li
80. the name of the print queue in the Name of printer or print queue on that server field NOTE The name must be a name of an existing destination queue on the NIC and must be lowercase by default You will most likely use diprn 101 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration 8 Click OK then Close The Add Printer Wizard dialog box reappears with the server address you entered added the list 9 Click Next asf Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an i installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers GCC Generic Text Only Generic IBM Graphics Spin Gestetner 4 Generic IBM Graphics Spin wide IBM Kodak Kunrera z Have Disk lt Back Cancel 10 Select Generic in the Manufacturers pane and click Next NOTE If you do not have the printer driver files go to www printronix com to download the files 11 Enter a name for this printer in the Printer name field and click Next 102 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Add Printer Wizard Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name Shared Not shared Share Name The Printer Select the operating systems of all computers that will be Printing to this printer Windows 95 Windows NT 4 0 MIPS Windows NT 4 0 Al
81. the printer and the network The submenu items available are as follows e O Port this menu item allows you to view the current status of the printer including the print jobs that are queued or are currently active e Network this menu item allows you to view the current status of the network connection Status I O Port The I O Port Status form allows you to remotely see what is happening on the NIC I O port The port s status and a list of active and queued jobs will be displayed You can cancel a job as long as you have permission by clicking the Cancel icon beside the desired job If you see waiting in the Status line this indicates the network adapter is either waiting for data from the host or for feedback from the printer If you see blocked in this line this indicates the printer is not allowing the NIC to send any more data The printer could be busy processing data it has already received or it could be in an error state The printer status display is automatically refreshed every minute 91 Chapter 3 Status Network NOTE You cannot cancel a print job with an IPDS Emulation Do not click the Cancel icon The printer s buffer size may not allow you to monitor the real time status of the printer and the print job at the same time The status feedback to the host usually reads printer idle unless the print job is significantly large Status Network This form allows you to view the cu
82. the state of the attached printer and click Finish NOTE Windows may ask for a disk or CD ROM to load the appropriate printer driver to complete this new printer setup Printronix Printing System PPS Host Setup There should now be a new printer icon within the Printers folder This new network printer relies on NetBIOS over TCP IP as the underlying protocol to print to the NIC Printronix Printing System PPS Host Setup Printronix Printing System is a direct socket printer port for Windows 9x Me NT perating systems It allows hosts to print directly to a TCP port number on NIC PPS is not required for Windows 2000 To configure a PPS port for a printer on a Windows station you will need to 1 Insert the software starter kit CD into the CD drive 2 Load the File Manager or WinFile and look on the CD fora PPS ZIP file 3 Double click PPS ZIP to extract all files within it to a directory on the Windows station 4 Once extracted to a directory find the Setup file and double click it to load the InstallShield Wizard 5 Answer the prompts throughout the Wizard and select Yes to restart your computer at the end 6 Once your computer is rebooted open the Settings gt Printers folder to view your existing printers NOTE PPS will only work with an existing printer Therefore if you do not have an existing printer that you can alter create one now using any port settings you would like These will be changed
83. was entered verify that xxx xxx xxx xxx is alive is printed under the Default Gateway Ping Test where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the Gateway Address If a Gateway Address was not entered the Default Gateway Ping test is not required and will not display on the page If the Netmask does not match complete the following steps a Place the printer offline b Using the front panel modify the Gateway value to 0 0 0 0 non configured c Place the printer online and wait for the E NET READY message to display d Place the printer offline and enter the Gateway Address you desire e Place the printer online and wait for the E NET READY message This saves the new Gateway Address Your NIC is now configured and connected to your network 39 40 WLAN ADAPTER WLAN CAUTION Chapter 2 Configuration Tools Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Control Panel NOTE The Access Point must be configured according to the manufacturer s installation guide To configure Wireless NIC card configure the ethernet and wireless IP addresses so they can be seen on the network This includes several network related settings e g an IP address within TCP IP environments configured through the built in command shell nosh or from the control panel IP Address Configuration You can set the wireless NIC IP settings from the printer control panel When the printer is first powered on the message E NET INIT d
84. you a different address if the IP address has not been previously assigned e Disable You choose the host server IP address After the selection the IP Address remains fixed even after you reboot Wireless Parameter Configuration Certain WIRELESS PARAMS must be configured to match the Access Point settings NOTE The ETHERNET PARAMS are configured the same way as the 10 100 Ethernet external NIC Please refer to the NETWORK SETUP menu in the User s Manual e Signal Strength This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal NOTE This is a display value only and cannot be changed 41 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools 42 e Operation Mode This is the operation mode of the wireless network The options include Infrastructure and Ad Hoc modes This must match the Access Point s configuration e SSID Name This is the Service Set Identifier which must be identical to the Access Point s SSID name The SSID name can be configured to a maximum of 32 alphanumeric characters The SSID name and alphanumeric characters are divided into three parts in the control panel menu as SSID Name 01 15 SSID Name 16 30 and SSID Name 31 32 NOTE When two or more consecutive space characters are used in the SSID enclose it in a double quoted string otherwise upon resetting the NIC the SSID Name wil be saved in the Wireless NIC with only one space e Min Xfer Rate Allows you to set the minimum speed
85. 0008 Back at the print server list select this newly defined NIC and press ENTER Select Print Server Configuration from the menu that displays Select Printer Configuration from the next menu to display a list of configured printers Select Not Installed as the first item and press ENTER At the printer configuration window type in the name for this new printer The name must be one of the predefined destinations queues on the NIC normally diprn Go to the Type field and press ENTER to see the possible choices Select Defined Elsewhere from this list When done press Escape and select Yes to save the changes to this new printer Press Escape again to return to the Print Server Configuration menu Select Queues Serviced by Printer Select this new printer from the printer list that displays and press ENTER Click Insert at the empty queue list that displays Select the queue created in step 5 and press ENTER When prompted for the priority press ENTER to select the default or select a priority Press ESCAPE until you are back at the PCONSOLE Main Menu 159 Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration 160 25 Repower the printer 26 Wait two minutes and then select Print Queue Information from the PCONSOLE Main Menu 27 Select this new queue from the menu that displays 28 Select Currently Attached Servers to see which print server is servicing this queue At this point the NIC name
86. 05 npsh Access Methods ccc cece cece eteeeeeeeneeeeeaes 305 Main nosh Command Prefixes n e 305 Getting Command Hel p c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeneeeees 306 Complete Command List cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeteneeeeeaes 307 Store COMMANAS S piis eee ernaia saa Raaen 307 Set CommaNdS misian aen iaaiiai aia Tanan Tii 322 List COMMAMNAS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseneeetecaeeeeaeeeteneeeeseneeeeas 335 Miscellaneous Commands s 339 16 Extra Features eneee 343 NIC SOCurity aiino isinira aeii aed Erria kanai 343 Users And PasswordS esesseseirsesrrrrserrrrrserrrrsrrreen 343 Reset The NIC PaSSword c cccccccseceeseeeeeteeeeteteeeeeaes 345 TOPA CESS S Sa r te nh dpa a ete tee 347 Printer Monitoring And Logging 349 Printer And Print Job Monitoring seeen 349 Printer Logging Through LogpathSs eeeeeeeeeen 350 Table of Contents Downloading Software Through The Network Interface Card NIC c ccescceeseeeseeeeeeteeetsneees 351 NIC Naming SCHEMES cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeteeeetenees 354 POriOGiC PING ize caves pr a E E AE ics 355 Glossary l Overview Introduction This chapter introduces you to the Network Interface Card NIC architecture and special features as well as providing information on installation and configuration tools What Is The NIC The NIC allows you to attach printers on a local area network LAN rather than attaching them
87. 1 change NIC name 178 password security 175 polling time 177 preferred file server 172 BOOTP Unix 131 Browse NIC troubleshooting 121 C Change destination names NIC 98 Change NIC frame type Bindery setup 180 NDS setup 180 Change NIC mode Bindery setup 181 NDS setup 181 Change NIC name Bindery setup 178 NDS setup 178 Channel 802 11b 60 Coax Printer Support FMD 275 Command list List commands 296 store commands 295 TN5250 295 TN5250 Auto Connect command 296 Command prefixes 306 npsh 305 Command Shell 305 ways to access 51 Commands 306 complete list 307 getting help 306 list 335 miscellaneous 339 set 322 store 307 Communcation routers Windows 96 Configuration administration 85 AFP with CRTPSFCFG on V3R2 253 alternatives 54 control panel 34 Encryption Key 44 Equivalent Wireless NIC 48 IP Address 40 Kerberos 89 Log Path 71 network 57 NIC for AIX 4 144 Index Print Model 68 Print Path 64 PSF for IPDS on V4R2 and above 261 PSF 400 for IPDS on V3R2 250 PSF 400 for IPDS on V3R7 and above 256 Security 89 SNMP 77 System 89 TN5250 3270 73 wireless NIC 40 Wireless Parameter 41 Configuration checklist MVS 212 Configuration menu NIC 56 Configuration Screens TN3270E 289 Configuration tools 34 Connecting to the network 33 Control panel message Dynamically Set Params Read Only 154 Control panel configuration 34
88. 1 Printronix Customer Support Center 32 Installation And Configuration Installation The NIC provides an RJ 45 connector for 10 100Base T UTP networks Connecting To The Network To attach the NIC to a network plug the network cable into the NIC connector ADAPTER Watch the LEDs in the rear of the printer as they cycle through the WLAN power on self test When the test is complete the STAT LED will ADAPTER begin to flash 33 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools Configuration Tools 34 CAUTION There are two parts to a NIC setup e Configuring the NIC so it can be seen on the network This involves network related settings e g an IP address within TCP IP environments configured through the built in command shell nosh or from the control panel Configuring a host with a new printer so it knows how to send data to the NIC Just being able to see the printer on the network does not mean you can automatically print to it A host has to be told where to send the data NOTE Some network environments do not require any network settings to be configured on the NIC However all network setups require configuration on the host end Configuration Using The Control Panel You can set NIC settings from the printer control panel When the printer is first powered on the message E NET INIT displays on the control panel To prevent a loss of NIC configuration information do not change the NIC
89. 213 Configuration Procedure ccceccceseeeeseeeeeseteeeteeeees 213 Verifying a TCP IP Attached Printer on 2 OG 0 223 Sharing Line Matrix Printers On Z OS n e 224 JES Spool Printer Sharing ccececeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeteees 224 Port Switching Printer Sharing c ccesseeeeeeeeeeees 226 Handling z OS Connectivity Problems s 226 Ping is Not Successful 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 226 Ping is Successful cecceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeesaeeeteneeeseaes 227 Table of Contents 10 AS 400 Configuration ASCII Printer 229 OVE IVICW is naa ceenetits Ge Potts E ee 229 Configuring AS 400 For ASCII Using TCP IP 0 08 231 Configuring With ADDTCPIFC 0 cccecceeeeeseeeeneeees 231 Configuring A Router Definition With ADDTCPRTE 233 Configuring A Local Domain And Hostname 0 233 Configuring A TCP IP Host Table Entry cceeee 233 Configuring The AS 400 For Printing ccceeeeeeeeeeees 234 Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files 0 cece 234 Verify Printing On AS 400 0 0 eecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeteeeeees 240 AS 400 ASCII Troubleshooting s 241 TCP IP Access Problem ccccccessceeeseeeeeeeeeeseneeteeeees 242 Web Browser HTTP Problem 244 11 AS 400 Configuration IPDS Printer 245 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer 245 Printing AFP IPDS And SCS Files cssceeee
90. 317 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 318 store tcpip del default 1 2 Example store tcpip route del default1 192 75 11 1 1 Delete a default router gateway defined by router IP Address lt router gt lt ifnum gt so the NIC knows where to direct packets destined for another subnet store tcpip route add host net lt network gt mask gt lt router gt lt ifnum gt lt metric gt Example store tcpip route add net 192 75 12 0 1 Add a static route to a particular TCP IP host or subnet specified by lt network gt so the NIC knows how to communicate with it Normally one entry for a default router gateway is all that is needed for communications between different subnets Please see the next command for details store tcpip route del host net lt network gt Example store tcpip route add net 192 75 12 0 1 Delete a static route to a particular TCP IP host or subnet specified by lt network gt so the NIC knows how to communicate with it Normally one entry for a default router gateway is all that is needed for communications between different subnets Please see the next command for details store tcpip tcp rxwin lt packets gt Example store tcpip tcp rxwin 2 Determine the receive window size for the NIC Usually the packets value ranges from 2 to 8 with the lower number allowing for more simultaneous TCP connections with the print server Store Commands store tcpip tcp opts keepalive disbufmgmt zeroIPA
91. 8 4116 or 65 6548 4182 Web site http www printronix com public supplies default aspx Printronix Inc Printronix Schweiz Gmbh Printronix Inc 14600 Myford Road 42 Changi South Street 1 Nederland BV P O Box 19559 Changi South Industrial P O Box 163 Nieuweweg 283 Irvine CA 92623 9559 Estate Singapore 486763 NI 6600 Ad Wijchen Phone 714 368 2300 Phone 65 6542 0110 The Netherlands Fax 714 368 2600 Fax 65 6543 0220 Phone 31 24 6489 489 Fax 31 24 6489 499 Or visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com 174302 001F
92. ADR gt 9 99 2 3 Figure 28 ASCII LPR Parameters The following parameter values are required Remote System Enter the hostname of your printer or INTNETADR which then prompts you to specify the IP address of your printer Printer Queue PRTQ Set to dilprn through d8prn The remote printer queue name must be in lowercase letters entered in single quotes NOTE When the IPDS feature is installed queue name d4prn is not available 235 Chapter 10 Configuring The AS 400 For Printing Destination Type DESTTYP Specify OTHER for the DESTTYP parameter Transform TRANSFORM Specify YES Manufacturer Type and Model MFRTYPMDL Select a manufacturer type and model This is the name of the WSCO Select IBM6400EP for Epson emulation or IBM6400 or 1BM42023 for Proprinter Emulation if you have AS 400 V3R2 and above or V3R7 and above Internet Address INTNETADR The IP address of the NIC NOTE You may specify either INTNETADR and the NIC IP address or the hostname for the NIC if you added the printer to the host table entry as directed in Configuring A TCP IP Host Table Entry on page 233 To Create An Automatic Remote Output Queue 1 From the AS 400 command line enter CRTOUTQ 2 Figure 29 displays in bold the parameters you need to specify 236 Send TCP IP Spooled File LPR Type choices press Enter Output queue OUTQ gt USERNAME Library CURLIB
93. AM Definitions For SCS and DSE TN3270E 277 TCPIP Configuration With TN3270E cccccceeenees 279 Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E 280 Configuration SCre ns ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaes 289 AS 400 Configuration TN5250 293 Setting Up TN5250 Print Queues On AS 400 ceee 293 Setting Up A TN5250 Connection Device Via A Telnet Session sis ssiascdsdssciseesesseceacaessaccasundssacsceedersieteedeaseetans 294 User Supplied Values ccccccccsseeceessseseeeeeesneeeeeseees 295 Using Telnet Commands for TN5250 c cccecesssteeeeeesees 295 COmManG Histara iaa eee een eee ees 295 Getting Started si veci wuaatiteeentndtien nen dave ies 296 TN5250 Job Formatting resini ee LiNE 297 Font Identifier FONT Help ceececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeteneees 299 Table of Contents 14 Monitoring Printers s es 301 Implementing Printer Management eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 301 Agent Manager MOodel ceeceseesseseeeeeneeesneeeneensaes 301 MIB ase iirhe ah eee ESE ee STE 302 SNMP iieri eles Wie dena aa aaa 303 Monitoring Toolse an a e E 303 OS 2 TOPI Piiri n a i e N 303 Monitoring With AIX NetView 6000 eeeeeere 304 The Remote Management Software cceeeees 304 Setting The SNMP Community Name 304 15 GommandS sorene dant schnell eaaan 305 Command Shell Overview cccccccceeseeeeeseeeeeeeneeessneeesaes 3
94. CP access list entry refer to TCP Access Lists on page 347 NOTE When the following procedure is used the TCP access list will be cleared but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is complete To reset all Adapter or WLAN Adapter NIC TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible 1 Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel See the User s Manual for configuration menu information 2 Power off the printer 3 On the Adapter or Wireless NIC place SWITCH 1 in the down position 4 Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state On the Adapter or Wireless NIC place SWITCH 1 in the up position TCP IP Access Problem 6 From a workstation attached to this network segment create an ARP entry The NIC IP address and hardware or MAC address are needed At the workstation enter arp s lt ipaddress gt lt MACaddress gt ping lt ipaddress gt 7 Try to ping this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network If the interface does not respond verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was created 8 Telnet into the NIC using the same IP address as above Log in as root with no password 9 Atsystem prompt enter store tcpip from default config http on reset NOTE This will reset all TCP IP settings to factory default and reset the NIC 10 Wait five minutes for the NIC to reset 11 Po
95. CTTMR MAXPNDRQS PRTCVT PRTRQSTMR FORMDF RMTLOCNAME DEPLOCNAME TEXT USRDFNOPT FILE NONE INQ QSYSOPR LIBL 170 6 YES NOMAX F1C10110 LIBL 128 9 12 134 NONE printer_type Network Printer Figure 34 Example CRTDEVPRT Command V3R7 and above 3 Values must be entered for the following parameters a Device Description DEVD The device description or name b Device Class DEVCLS Specify LAN c Device Type TYPE Specify IPDs 260 Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above Device Model MODEL Specify 0 LAN Attachment LANATTACH Specify IP Port Number PORT Specify 5001 Font FONT Enter an appropriate value Form Feed FORMFEED Specify CONT Activation Timer ACTTMR This value specifies the number of seconds that PSF 400 waits for a printer to respond to an activation request If only one system is using the printer use the default value 170 seconds If more than one system is using the printer specify NOMAX which causes PSF 400 to wait indefinitely for a response to an activation request Remote Location RMTLOCNAME Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer User Defined Object USRDFNOBJ To use a PSF configuration object specify its name and library here This object type must be PSFcFG For V3R7 and higher a single PSF configuration object may be referenced by multiple device descriptions if required Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4
96. Chapter 15 Complete Command List set ifc Example set ifc lt ifnum gt upldown Set state of the specified network physical interface up or down lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the NIC device set logpath lt logpath gt name lt new_name gt Example set logpath 11 name pagecount Change the current name of the logpath lt logpath gt to a new name as indicated by lt new_name gt These names are case sensitive set logpath lt logpath gt type job user cksum printer ioport Example set logpath 12 type job user printer pgent Establish the type of printer and print job logging to be done within this lt logpath gt The options are job Job ID username etc user User ID along with three messages per job about start and finish cksum 16 bit checksum value to confirm integrity of data printed printer For special printer feedback ioport Printer error messages determined through the parallel port pins set logpath lt logpath gt port lt TCP port gt email syslog Example set logpath 13 port 2000 Determine where the log information should be sent for a print job or attached printer The choices are TCP port TCP port number ranging from 1024 to 65000 email Particular user s email address This address is set using the set sysinfo email emailname IPaddress or emailname domain com command 324 Set Commands syslog A central TCP IP host running the SYSLOG daemon This host is s
97. Credentials Information 91 CRTLINETH line descriptions 229 Customer Support Center 31 D Default Key 802 11b 61 Define LPR printer error 121 Destination settings Print Path 64 Destinations models 21 NIC 21 Device Description TN5250 3270 75 Device Type TN5250 3270 76 365 Index DIP Switches 28 Direct socket printing 148 Document conventions 30 Downloading software 351 Dynamically Set Params Read Only message 154 E E mail alert posting 78 Encryption Key Configuration 44 Equivalent Wireless NIC Configuration 48 Errors defining LPR printer 121 F File Server Novell Network 63 Filter Print Model 69 Filter Print Path 66 Font Identifier TN5250 299 FrameType Novell Network 63 FTP printing 147 G Getting Help command 306 Getting started NIC with AS400 running TN5250 296 Guest user NIC 343 H Header String Print Model 69 Header String Print Path 67 Help command getting 306 Home page URL 51 366 Host configuration Novell 158 Unix 133 Host IP TN5250 3270 74 Host setup Printronix Printing System PPS 117 Windows 2000 104 Windows 3 1 118 Windows 9x 116 Windows Me 116 Windows NT 3 51 114 Windows NT 4 0 100 Windows XP 104 HP UX 134 HTML method print server setup 176 NIC structure 52 HTML forms 51 Novell 157 HTTP troubleshooting 124 l I O Port status 91 Indicators 10 100Base T 24 Information credentials 91 Installation HP U
98. DS TN5250 and PJL jobs only This is available as a performance enhancement for LPR TCP socket printing etc The job flow control has no affect on IPDS TN5250 and PJL jobs These options perform their own control When jobcontrol is enabled all jobs will be supported with job flow control NOTE When jobcontrol is disabled dynamic config loading on a model change is also disabled 313 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 314 e off no job control no SOJ EOJ commands The printer prints faster in off mode e standard the default traditional job control with immediate acknowledgements of SOJ EOJ commands e enhanced job control with EOJ acknowledgements held off by the printer until job is fully printed The printer prints slower in enhanced mode To monitor the printer use the telnet command Ipstat The normal status reported on the first line of the lpstat response is the status of the queue LPQ within the NIC The status reported does not reflect the state of the print job once it has been sent from the NIC to the printer The new line at the bottom of the lpstate response labeled printer job can report one of two status values a In Progress A job in the printer is not yet finished b Done There are no jobs in the printer All previous jobs are finished Example store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout 5 If jobsecurity is disabled any user can cancel queued jobs on the NIC including guest u
99. E NONE Text TEXT printer_typeNetwork Printer Figure 31 Example of CRTDEVPRT Command V3R2 3 Values must be entered for the following parameters a Device Description DEVD The device description or name This value must match the value entered for the PSFCFG parameter in Configuring AFP With CRTPSFCFG On V3R2 on page 253 b Device Class DEVCLS Specify RMT c Device Type TYPE Specify IPDS d Device Model MODEL Specify 0 e Advanced Function Printing AFP Specify YES f AFP Attachment AFPATTACH Specify APPC CRTPSFCFG overrides this value 252 Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R2 g Font FONT Enter an appropriate value h Form Feed FORMFEED Specify CONT i Remote Location RMTLOCNAME Enter the remote location name Configuring AFP With CRTPSFCFG On V3R2 The PSF configuration object created with this command is used by PSF 400 when printing IPDS files The object is used by AS 400 V3R2 only if the object is in the QGPL library and has the same name as the printer device description This information overrides the APPC configuration information specified in the printer device description To configure AS 400 for IPDS printing on V3R2 1 At the AS 400 command line enter a command in the form CRTPSFCFG PSFCFG printer type IPDSPASTHR YES RLSTMR SEC15 TEXT printer type NETWORK PRINTER RMTLOCNAME 128 99 12 1347 PORT 5001 where print
100. ER WLAN Kerberos Enabled Wireless NIC Configuration store ifc 2 wlan defkey disablel 1 4 store ifc 2 wlan key lt key num gt lt key sequence gt store ifc 2 wlan auth lt AUTH METHOD gt store ifc 2 wlan user lt AUTH USER NAME gt store ifc 2 wlan pass lt AUTH PASSWORD gt Refer to page 307 for the complete command set Kerberos Enabled Wireless NIC Configuration This section provides an example of how a user configures the Print Server to use the Kerberos authentication via the wired Telnet session This example assumes Symbol s Access Point and RF card is used and the Print Server has not been configured for Kerberos authentication It also assumes that the KDC Access Point and the Print Server are in the same realm To set up the Print Server for Kerberos authentication the administrator first has to enable Kerberos in the Access Point according to Symbol s instructions Symbol s Access Point must have its Network time set up with the correct time server Once the Access Point is configured the Print Server is ready to be configured for Kerberos authentication Configuring the Print Server for Kerberos Authentication 1 Create a user in the Windows 2000 server that identifies the Print Server NOTE The user name should be the Print Server s name The password selected will be used as the Kerberos password and should be set with no expiration 2 In a secure networked environment log in as a root us
101. ERS PAGEDEF A06462 DEVICE PAGEDEF DEFAULT FORMDEF A10110 DEVICE FORMDEF DEFAULT MCHARS GF10 DEVICE GS10 TU10 GU10 DEFAULT FONT SET PIMSG YES ACCUMULATE DATA SET MESSAGES DATACK BLOCK REPORT ALL DATA CHECK ERRORS TRACE NO CREATE INTERNAL TRACE FAILURE WCONNECT PSF ACTION ON PRINTER 221 Chapter 9 Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files FAILURE TIMEOUT REDRIVE PSF ACTION ON TIMEOUT IMGMTMODE OUTAVAIL PRINTER MANAGEMENT MODE HDISCINTV 15 DISCONNECT INTERVAL IN SECONDS NPADDR xxx xxx xxx xxx IP ADDRESS FOR TCP IP HPRT1ENDCNTL Figure 25 Sample PSFPROC procedure NOTE To specify a TCP IP address space name other than the default TCPIP code the following exec statement in the writer procedure STEPOLEXEC PGM ASPPIEP REGION 4096K PARM tcpip name where tcpip name is the name of the TCP IP address space If this parameter is not coded PSF uses the default name TCPIP The IP address is the only required parameter Other parameters may be set to facilitate printer sharing as described in Sharing Line Matrix Printers on z OS on page 224 For a description of the PRINTDEV statement which is not given here see the PSF System Programming Guide IPADDR Specifies the IP address for the printer or attachment in dotted decimal notation Do not specify a hostname in place of t
102. I checksum I printer C pm none C TCPAP Port Logpath Port e g 4010 syslog email Submit Clear Form Figure 11 Log Path Configuration Name Name of the log path The default names are 11 12 13 14 15 16 I7 and l8 Logpath Type Define what type of log information will be tracked for each print job passing through the associated destination The types are e job job ID username etc e user user ID and three messages per job about the start and finish e checksum value used when troubleshooting integrity of data transferred e printer miscellaneous messages from the printer e i o port status of the printer based on the port interface signals 71 72 Chapter 3 Log Path Configuration Logpath Port Define where logging information for print jobs passing through the associated destination will be reported The choices are prn reported to the PRN port none don t report any logging information TCP IP port to a TCP port number specified in the edit field syslog to a host specified by the IP address in the edit field running a SYSLOG daemon email to an e mail address specified by the e mail address and the SMTP server IP address edit fields You can set the option on the Administration web page Default no logging turned on TN5250 3270 Configuration TN5250 3270 Configuration The TN5250 3270 configuration form allows you to specify settings for up to e
103. IBM Set the Printer Type to IBM4202 You must change the printer emulation to Proprinter 6 Enter the following Remote Print Queue with Local Filtering settings Name of queue any_name user selectable Host Name of Remote Server Name of Queue on Remote Server name in etc hosts file or the NIC IP address diprn Type of Print Spooler Leave Pass Through Flag BSD Press the list button and choose BSD Yes 145 Chapter 5 SCO Setup 146 Troubleshooting This installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required In addition you can also ping and telnet to the NIC adapter To verify the NIC settings print an E net Test Page by doing the following e P5000 T5000e SL5000e DIAGNOSTICS gt Printer Tests gt E Net Test Page gt Enter e P7000 T5000r SL5000r DIAGNOSTICS gt Printer Tests gt Ethernet Test gt Enter e L55xx L1524 DIAGNOSTICS Test Pattern gt E Net Test Page gt Enter The default NIC queue name is diprn in lower case however the name can be changed To verify the queue name print an E Net Test Page or telnet to the adapter and do a list dest command AIX Remote Queue Time Out Setting Symptoms Print jobs restart or queue goes down If the queue is set up for standard processing not local filtering add T50 flag to rembak to the queue device stanza
104. NIC up as a PSERVER replacing a dedicated printer e Set the NIC up as an RPRINTER interacting with an existing PSERVER see page 166 NOTE Following a PSERVER setup bindery emulation is required To configure the NIC as a PSERVER in a NetWare 4 or 5 environment 1 Log into the Novell as supervisor Enter PCONSOLE Press F4 Select Print Queues Click Insert to add a queue Type in a new queue name and press ENTER Press Escape Select Print Servers oO ON OA PF WO DN Click Insert to add the new print server Oo Type the name of the NIC The default is M_xxxxxx or M302_xxxxx for the Wireless Adapter where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the NIC address found on the configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet Parameters MAC address e g M_091C1A or M302_00008 11 Select this new print server and press ENTER 12 Select Printers 13 Click Insert to add a printer to the list 163 Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration 164 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Type in the name of one of the default destinations on the unit for the Name field and go to the Type field Press ENTER at this field and select Defined Elsewhere If Defined Elsewhere is not available choose Parallel Press ENTER on the Print Queues Assigned field Click Insert to display all queues select the one you defined in step 5 and press ENTER Select a priority and press ENTE
105. OTE On the load command you must strictly follow the case of the name this is not required on NIC 4 Viaa Telnet or npsh session create RPRINTER attachments store rprinter add Fin_Q 1 dlprn This command assigns destination diprn as the RPRINTER 1 service path store rprinter add Fin _Q 2 d4prn This command assigns destination d4prn as the RPRINTER 2 service path For NIC entries case does not have to be observed Also if you want to change the destination names from dxprn do so first with the set dest lt dest gt name lt new name gt command being sure to use the save command so these reappear after a reboot 5 Reboot the NIC adapter power the printer off and on or use the reset command so the new RPRINTER service names are broadcast 6 Open a Telnet or npsh session and log into NIC Wait a minute or two then use the list rprinter command and you should see your entries You could also do this by looking at the connection status on the 4 xor 5 x PSERVER printer status entries 167 Chapter 6 Novell Troubleshooting Tips 7 If you add delete or change RPRINTER entries on NIC or 4 x or 5 x console you should always unload and reload the pserver nim module to register the changes The NIC can be configured and ready before the pserver nlm is reloaded or NIC can be reset after pserver nim is reloaded A Web browser can also be used to see the RPRINTER attachments and status Novell Troubleshooting T
106. P address configured OFF flashes on two times per IP address not configured second ON flashes off once per second Download MOS ON flashes off twice per second Error Network Indicator The NET LED displays the status of the network link When the NET LED is on link integrity is confirmed The NET LED flashes off for 1 3 second when a data packet is being transferred When the NET LED is off the network connection has been severed Table 2 NET LED Indicator NET Indication Description ON constantly Indicates link integrity ON flashes off 1 3 second Flashes off 1 3 second each time a packet is transmitted 25 Chapter 1 Interfaces 26 Table 4 shows the STAT LED states for various sytem conditions ETHERNET Integrated NIC Card LED Table 3 Integrated NIC LED Indicator NET Indication Description ON flashes Indicates activity ON constant Indicates that the link is good at 10 Mbps ON constant Indicates that the link is good at 100 Mbps Wireless Network Indicator WLAN The wireless NIC has 2 bi color LEDs which can produce three ADAPTER colors each green red and yellow green and red combined Table 4 Wireless NIC STAT LED States System Condition STAT LED System is running without an IP address Green 2 Hz flash System is running with an IP address Green 1 Hz flash System error Red 2Hz flash System is in upgrade mode with an IP address Yellow 1 Hz flash
107. PRINTRONIX Network Interface Card User s Manual READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER Software License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED Definitions Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable data and program The term Software Product includes the Software resident in the printer and its documentation The Software Product is licensed not sold to you and Printronix Inc either owns or licenses from other vendors who own all copyright trade secret patent and other proprietary rights in the Software Product License 1 Authorized Use You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or personal purposes 2 Restrictions a To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix Inc you agree to maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning the typefaces in strict confidence b You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product C You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software Product
108. R Priority 1 should be sufficient Press Escape until you are back to Main Menu Reboot the Print Server by repowering the printer Check the Currently Attached Servers and verify the print server is active Press Escape until you are out of the PCONSOLE Even though the entire print set up is done through PCONSOLE you may want to communicate directly with the print server in order to modify settings monitor the unit etc To communicate with the print server the optional host software npsh exe is included npsh exe is a DOS executable program that can be run from a DOS prompt on a NetWare workstation npsh exe performs the following npsh nvplist Lists all of the NIC devices on the network each name is in the default format For the integrated NIC the default is P_xxxxxx For the external E Net Adapter the default is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the NIC address found on the configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet Parameters MAC address This is regardless of whether it is configured as a PSERVER or as an RPRINTER NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x PSERVER Setup npsh unitname Starts a Telnet like session with the named print server allowing you to configure monitor and troubleshoot the unit with the built in command set npsh unitname command Initiates a single command with guest access only to the unit instead of entering into a complete session To communi
109. R2 And Above To configure IPDS on the iSeries V4R3 use the following commands CRTDEVPRT CRTPSFCFG Optional 261 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer Configuring AFP with CRTPSFCFG on V4R3 and Above Optional To configure the iSeries for IPDS printing on V4R3 1 At the iSeries command line enter a command in the form CRIPSFCFG PSFCFG AFP NETPRTP7000 IPDSPASTHR YES RLSTMR SEC15 TEXT PRINTRONIX P7000 NETWORK ATTACHED PRINTER PAGSIZCTL YES ACTRLSTMR NORDYF 2 Acompleted screen looks like Figure 35 Create PSF Configuration CRTPSFCFG PSF configuration 000 Name LIBA ao gt CURLIB Name CURLIB User resource library list JOBLIBL JOBLIBL CURLIB NONE Device resource library list DFT Name DFT for more values IPDS pass through 0 00 gt NO NO YES Activate release timer 0 NORDYF NORDYF IMMED Release timet 00 000 gt NOMAX 1 1440 NOMAX SEC15 Restart timer ccccccssssseeeeeees IMMED 1 1440 IMMED APPC and TCP IP retry count 15 1 99 NOMAX Delay between APPC retries 90 0 999 Acknowledgment frequency 100 1 32767 Printer response timer NOMAX 5 3600 NOMAX Generate PDF output NONE NONE SPLF STMF MAIL Text description 00 gt BLANK Additional Parameters Automatic session recovery Enabled sssi NO NO YES Mes
110. Request Message is set to 16 bytes such that the Ethernet frame is set to 64 bytes to minimize the impact of bandwidth on the network This process applies to all the active NIC interfaces 355 Chapter 16 Periodic Ping 356 Glossary ARP bps Centronics daemon default router destination DHCP Download Mode DNS Address Resolution Protocol Associates a selected IP address with a network device Ethernet address Bits per second Parallel port interface standard found on most printers A continuously running process that handles system wide functions like print spooling Local device that forwards any IP packets destined for another subnet Logical print queue on the NIC to which hosts send their print jobs There are eight destinations by default Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Allows a network device to discover its IP address dynamically upon bootup The IP address does not need to be stored within the device itself permanently Refers to the condition of the NIC when in a startup condition downloading configuration information Domain Name Server Host providing responses to queries for a given host name IP address 357 358 EEPROM factory defaults Factory Settings Firmware Panic Flash FTP gateway gateway address Hardware Exception HTML ifnum interface script I O port Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Settings shipped wi
111. SG DD DSN ANDREE z OS4 MSGFILE DISP SHR ISYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSABEND DD SYSOUT SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT I Figure 38 Example Of Proc Used To Start INFOPRINT Server 276 VTAM Definitions For SCS and DSE TN3270E NETSPL1 VBUILD TYPE APPL APPL REPRESENTING IPS APIPP101 APPL MODETAB MODETAB1 DLOGMOD SCS AUTH ACQ LUPRT101 APPL MODETAB MODETAB1 DLOGMOD SCS Figure 39 Example Of The APPLID That Represents A Copy Of IPDS VTAM Definitions For SCS and DSE TN3270E The following are VTAM definitions for SCS and DSE TN3270E printers NOTE These definitions are identical to those of COAX attached printers JES2 TN3270E VTAM MAJOR NODE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LU1 Printer RMT2 APPL AUTH ACQ EAS 1 PARSESS NO SESSLIM YES X MODETAB MODETAB1 DLOGMOD SCS LU3 Printer RMT3 APPL AUTH ACQ EAS 1 PARSESS NO SESSLIM YES X MODETAB MODE4245 DLOGMOD LU3PRT Figure 40 MODTAB Entries 277 Chapter 12 Program Materials kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk PRINTER WITH SNA CHARACTER SET LU_1 DA22961 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SCS MODEENT LOGMODE SCS FMPROF X 03 TSPROF X 03 PRIPROT X B1 SECPROT X 90 COMPROT X 3080 RUSIZES X 87C6 PSERVIC X 01000000E100000000000000 5 PSNDPAC X 01 SRCVPAC X 01 TITLE DSC4K kkkkkkkkkkkkkk
112. This will reset all TCP IP settings to factory default and reset the NIC 123 Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips ETHERNET 124 WLAN 10 Power the printer off and then back on 11 Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway parameters to the desired values To reset all Integrated NIC TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible contact your Printronix service representative for assistance If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance Web Browser HTTP Problem In some cases you may not be able to browse the printer Web page simply because the NIC HTTP may be turned off If you cannot ping the NIC IP address make sure the IP Address subnet mask and default gateway are set correctly by checking the Ethernet Parameters menu from the operator panel See the User s Manual for configuration menu information If you can ping the NIC IP address but cannot access the Web pages perform the following procedure to verify the NIC HTTP is turned on 1 Telnet into the NIC and log in as root There is no password by default 2 Atthe system prompt enter the following commands config http on save reset 3 After approximately 30 seconds point your browser to the NIC IP address The printer Web pages should now be accessible If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing
113. Unconfigured empty host Port Specifies the UDP port number of the TN5250 or TN3270 server for the current configuration Default 23 T N5250 3270 Configuration Resource Name TN3270 mode Specifies the name of the AS 400 LU session for the current configuration The resource name entered will be the name of the printer device created on the AS 400 host for the current session The name is limited to 10 characters in length must start with an alpha character a z A Z and contain only alphanumeric characters and underscores Default Unconfigured empty resource name Device Description TN5250 mode Specifies the name of the printer device for the current configuration The description entered will be the name of the printer device created on the AS 400 host for the current session The name is limited to 10 characters in length must start with an alpha character a z A Z and contain only alphanumeric characters and underscores Default Unconfigured empty description Message Queue Name TN5250 mode Specifies the queue name to which system messages will be logged Default QSYSOPR Message Queue Library TN5250 mode Specifies the queue library to which system messages will be logged Default LIBL 75 76 Chapter 3 1N5250 3270 Configuration Device Type By default the device type is always set to IBM WSCST Name TN5250 mode As declared on the AS 400 host for the created printer de
114. Within this Novell Printer Gateway various printer connection modes can be used to install the printer into NDPS The ones described here are e Setup using Forward Jobs to a Queue Mode e Setup using LPR Mode e Setup using RPRINTER Mode 191 Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T 192 Setup using Forward Jobs to a Queue Mode In this mode an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS client then forwards these jobs to an existing Netware queue The Netware queue would then be serviced by the printer in some manner 1 The printer must first be set up to service some Netware queue either by doing a PSERVER or RPRINTER mode setup from previous chapters 2 When setting up the NDPS printer agent use the Novell Printer Gateway Select NONE for Novell PDS Select Forward Jobs to a Queue for Port Handler then choose the queue used in step 1 above and note the Caution statement about the Queue User Name 5 Select no driver in the Select Printer Drivers dialog unless you have a driver installed into the Broker s RMS which is to be used with the printer Any jobs sent to this printer agent will then be forwarded to the specified queue Setup using LPR Mode In this mode an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS client then forwards these jobs to a printer using the LPR protocol 1 The printer must first be set up with IP connectivity and be able to receive jobs using the LPR protocol 2
115. X 134 SCO 136 Solaris 2 6 135 Installation Solaris 7 135 Installation NIC 33 Interface TCP IP Network 58 IP Address Configuration 40 IPDS configuration checklist AS 400 246 verify on AS 400 268 IPDS file printing 245 IPDS printer configuring on AS 400 245 J Job formatting TN5250 297 K Kerberos 49 configuration 89 Parameters 46 Key 802 11b 60 L LEAP Parameters 45 Line descriptions CRTLINETH 229 List commands 335 TN5250 296 Log Path configuration 71 Logpath Port 72 Logpath Type 71 Name 71 Log Path Port Print Path 67 Log Path Type Print Path 67 Logging printer 349 Logical printer architecture 19 Logpath Port Log Path 72 Logpath Type Log Path 71 Logpaths printer logging 350 Index LPR command OS 2 204 Port Daemon OS 2 207 print queue OS 2 205 LPR LPD Host setup 143 M Manager model printer monitoring 301 Manual notes 31 notices 31 Manual Telnet method print server setup 176 Manual LPR LPD Host setup 143 Manual system V Host setup 133 Message Queue Library TN5250 3270 75 Message Queue Name TN5250 3270 75 MIB 302 Microsoft TCP IP printing 125 Miscellaneous commands 339 Mode auto reset 25 run 25 Mode 802 11b 59 Mode TN5250 3270 74 Model Type Print Model 68 Model Type Print Path 66 Models 21 setting a formfeed 152 setting onlcr 151 367 Index Monitoring print job 349 printer 349 MVS configuration c
116. XCTL 40 THRESHOLD OFF TEXT Active Switched Controllers No active switched controllers attached SSAP list SSAP Source Service Access Points SSAP Maximum Frame Type SSAP Maximum Frame Type 04 1496 SNA AA 1496 NONSNA 12 NONSNA c8 1496 HPR Group address GRPADR Group Addresses No group addresses found Link speed Cost connect time Cost byte Security for line Propagation delay User defined 1 User defined 2 User defined 3 LINKSPEED 10M COSTCNN 0 COSTBYTE 0 SECURITY NONSECURE PRPDLY LAN USRDFN1 128 USRDFN2 128 USRDFN3 128 Autocreate controller AUTOCRTCTL NO Recovery limits CMNRCYLMT Count limit 2 Time interval 5 Figure 26 Example NIC Line Description Configuring With ADDTCPIFC The following three parameters must be specified Line Description LIND The line description name is the user s name for the AS 400 adapter This name must be identical to the name entered when the TCP IP is configured on the AS 400 Resource Name RSRCNAME The system assigned name for the interface for example LINO41 SSAP When CALC is used the values of 12 and AA are entered automatically as defaults Verify that those SSAP values have not been changed Configuring AS 400 For ASCII Using TCP IP The next step is to configure the interface on the AS 400 for TCP IP NOTE The AS 400 interface is not the NIC Do not set the AS 400 interface address to the same address as the NIC IP a
117. ame print an E Net Test Page or telnet to the adapter and perform a list dest command Internet address INTNETADR Specify the IP address of the printer Verify Printing On AS 400 240 This section verifies that the printer is capable of printing ASCII files and that the printer can be pinged on the network To test ASCII printing 1 Start TCP IP if it is not already running by entering the command STRTCP 2 Verify that the AS 400 TCP IP interface is active Verify Printing On AS 400 3 Ping the printer from an AS 400 workstation with the command ping ip address Where ip address is the Internet address of the remote system printer the NIC or the hostname of the printer if you put the hostname in the host entry table as directed in Configuring A TCP IP Host Table Entry on page 233 4 If the printer cannot be pinged proceed to AS 400 ASCII Troubleshooting on page 241 5 Use one of the following methods to send a spooled file to the printer e Enter the LPR command on the AS 400 command line with the appropriate parameters See To Use LPR Manually on page 234 e Enter STRRMTWTR name on the AS 400 command line where name is the name of the AS 400 remote output queue not the printer Internet queue as described on To Create An Automatic Remote Output Queue on page 236 e Use the WRKOUTQ command to send jobs AS 400 ASCII Troubleshooting During power up the pri
118. apter 10 Configuring The AS 400 For Printing Configuring The AS 400 For Printing 234 To configure an AS 400 for printing you must e set up the printing capability and e verify the setup with a print job You will need the following information Remote Printer Queue name Set to dlprn through d8prn NOTE The Remote Printer Queue name must be in lowercase letters Do not use PASS NOTE When the IPDS feature is installed the queue name d4prn is not available IP Address The IP address for the NIC Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files The next step is to set up the remote printing capability There are two ways to do this you can either specify the LPR parameters manually each time you send a file to the printer or use Remote Writer and a remote output queue for automatic printing to the printer To Use LPR Manually 1 Start TCP IP if it is not already running by entering the command STRTCP 2 At the AS 400 command line enter LPR 3 Figure 28 displays in bold the parameters you need to specify Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files Send TCP IP Spooled File LPR Type choices press Enter Remote system RMTSYS gt INTNETADR Printer queue PRTQ gt diprn Job name JOB j User Number Spooled file number SPLNMBR ONLY Destination type DESTTYP OTHER Transform SCS to ASCII TRANSFORM YES Manufacturer type and model MFRTYPMDL gt IBM6400EP Internet address INTNET
119. ard configuration errors If you require technical support please have as much of the following information available when you Call 1 oa F oO DN What level of software are you running What type of attachment do you have What is your host operating system How often and when does the problem occur Give a detailed description of the problem Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network Have you configured the NIC with a unique and valid IP address which corresponds with the other IP addresses on your network For example are you sure no other device is using this IP address Are you sure you are trying to talk to the NIC from a Unix station on the same subnet Currently the print server can only be seen locally unless you configured it with a routing entry If you look at the back of the printer is the STAT LED flashing once a second or is it quicker than that A slower once a second rate tells you that the print server is in fact configured with an IP address A faster rate indicates it knows nothing about this so you may need to try the configuration process again Have you confirmed that the network connection to the NIC is working correctly Trying different network cables and locations will help narrow down the problem 149 Chapter 5 Unix Troubleshooting Tips 150 Nothing Prints Can you ping the NIC from your Unix station If no
120. ase entered in single quotes NOTE When the IPDS feature is installed queue name d4prn is not available Writer to Autostart AUTOSRTWTR Set the value to 1 This will start the Remote Writer when the queue is created and it automatically starts the Remote Writer after each IPL of the AS 400 and whenever STRTCP is started Connection Type CNNTYPE Specify this value as IP Destination Type DESTTYP Specify OTHER OTHER is a performance enhancement in which data is not required to be transformed again if the connection is interrupted and allows printing of multiple copies Transform TRANSFORM Specify this value as YES Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files Manufacturer Type MFRTYPMDL Select a manufacturer type and model This is the name of the WSCO Select IBM6400EP for Epson emulation or IBM6400PR or IBM42023 for Proprinter Emulation NOTE NOTE Select the Manufacturer Type Model based on the data type Report printing text only no IGP or barcodes Manufacturer Type Model IBM42023 Workstation customizing object NONE Since IBM42023 is a Printronix XL emulation the printer emulation must also be switched to Proprinter emulation Be sure to save the printer emulation as the power up configuration Alternate selection Manufacturer Type Model IBM6400EP Workstation Customizing Object NONE Since IBM6400EP is an Epson emulation the printer emulation must be also switched to
121. at level of software are you running What type of attachment do you have What is your host operating system Give a detailed description of the problem How often and when does the problem occur Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached 119 Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips 120 NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your NIC configuration e Have you assigned the NIC a unique and valid IP address which corresponds with the other IP addresses on your network For example are you sure no other device is using this IP address e Are you sure you are trying to talk to the NIC from a Windows station on the same subnet Currently the print server can only be seen locally unless you configured a routing entry earlier e If you look at the back of the printer is the STAT LED flashing once a second or is it quicker than that A slower once a second rate indicates that the print server is in fact configured with an IP address A faster rate means it knows nothing about this so you may need to try the configuration process again e Have you confirmed that the network connection to the NIC is working correctly Trying different network cables and locations will help narrow down the problem e For wireless NIC is the SSID correct Is the operation mode correct HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display e Can you p
122. at which the Wireless Option will accept a connection in million bits per second This is the wireless transfer rate and can be set to either enable or disable It is set to enable when the operation mode is Infrastructure so that the NIC can automatically detect the optimal transfer rate If the operation mode is Ad Hoc and the transfer rate is known the user can enable or disable the corresponding transfer rate in the menus Xfer Rate 1Mb Xfer Rate 2Mb Xfer Rate 5 5Mb or Xfer Rate 11Mb e Channel This is the frequency used for wireless communication The 2 4GHz band spectrum is divided into different channels 1 15 It is set to Default so that the NIC can detect the correct channel to communicate with the Access Point in infrastructure mode If the operation mode is Ad Hoc and the channel is known the user can set the corresponding channel in this menu Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Control Panel e Ant Diversity This is used to select the antenna for communication It is recommended to set to Diverse for the NIC to detect for optimal communication It can also be set to Primary or Auxiliary e Preamble This is the preamble used in the wireless packets It is recommended to set to Default so that the NIC can detect the correct preamble The preamble is approximately 8 bytes of the packet header generated by the AP is and attached to the packet prior to transmission The preamb
123. aul Harris Set a person or department to contact in case of print server trouble set sysinfo location lt string gt Example set sysinfo location salesdept Set the physical location of the NIC This is for identification purposes and is not used in the operation of the print server in any way set sysinfo prnserial lt string gt Example set sysinfo prnserial 000123456789 Sets the printer serial number 331 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 332 set sysinfo loginfo sys tcp ipx spx Example set sysinfo loginfo sys ipx Set the NIC debugging information type Usually this information includes unexpected errors or exceptions from the print server divided into these groups sys General system messages tcp TCP stack messages ipx IPX stack messages spx SPX stack messages NOTE This is not printer or job logging information set sysinfo logport null prn syslog Example set sysinfo logport null Define to where the debugging information should be sent This can be sent to an output device off of the NIC I O port or toa central TCP IP host running a SYSLOG daemon To set this host use the command set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress set sysinfo smtp lt IPaddress gt port lt portnum gt Example set sysinfo smtp 192 75 11 5 port 25 Define the SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server IP address or domain name and port number where the mail is stored on your network Default Unconfigured 25
124. ay in the BOOTP response from the BOOTP server Communicating Across Routers Since Unix environments rely on TCP IP to communicate with the NIC crossing routers becomes an issue After you have followed one of the NIC configuration methods mentioned other than the BOOTP method most likely you will only be able to communicate with the print server from the same subnet This means any host across a router will not be able to see your NIC In order to communicate across a router store a default router gateway within the print server so that any packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router automatically The router or series of routers can then take over the process of ensuring the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your network To configure a default router gateway within the NIC 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no default password Manual System V Host Setup 2 Atthe Network Configuration HTML form that displays click the first field below Gateway and type in the IP address of the default router gateway for the NIC subnet 3 Click Submit when done and physically repower the print server to make sure the new setting is in e
125. ays The range is 1 3 and the default is 1 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Tckt Life Units will display on the Tckt Life SEC menu For example if you select Hours the Tckt Life SEC menu name will change to Tckt Life HR 47 48 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools Renew Life Units Renew lifetime unit in either seconds minutes hours or days e Seconds default e Minutes e Hours e Days Renew Life SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds SEC minutes MIN hours HR or days DAY as specified by the Renew Life Units before warning for a new Kerberos password e Seconds The range is 0 604800 and the default is O e Minutes The range is 0 10080 and the default is 0 e Hours The range is 0 168 and the default is 0 e Days The range is 0 7 and the default is 0 The selected submenu is in Renew Life Units will display on the Renew Life SEC menu For example if you select Days the Renew Life SEC menu name will change to Renew Life DAY Equivalent Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Telnet Command store ifc 2 wlan ssid lt network name gt store ifc 2 wlan mode adhoclpseudolmanaged store ifc 2 wlan speed autol 1 2 5 11 store ifc 2 wlan channel defaultl 1 15 store ifc 2 wlan antenna diverselprimarylaux store ifc 2 wlan preamble defaultllonglshort store ifc 2 wlan pmm onloff store ifc 2 wlan txpwr 0 100 store ifc 2 wlan opts Jopenauth intn WLAN ADAPT
126. between computer systems or between a printer and a host computer For computer printers a protocol is the coding convention used to convey and print data A printer protocol includes codes for printing text and graphics as well as codes instructing the printer to perform special operations and machine to machine communication codes Print Server A Novell print method where the NIC continuously polls the Novell file server print queue looking for print jobs Random Access Memory Volatile memory within the NIC that contains current working settings Settings are lost once the power is removed Reverse Address Resolution Protocol Allows a network device to discover its IP address dynamically upon bootup The IP address does not need to be stored within the device itself permanently ROM router RPRINTER SNMP socket subnet mask TCP IP TCP port telnet UTP WAN Read Only Memory A device that forwards IP packets to their destination Also called a gateway Remote Printer A Novell print method where the NIC waits for jobs to be sent to it from a defined PSERVER Simple Network Management Protocol A standard protocol used to monitor network devices called SNMP agents TCP connection between two hosts consisting of a source and destination TCP port number at each end A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller sub networks or subnets This mask is used to help determine whet
127. bnet Mask for this AS 400 TCP IP interface for example 255 255 255 0 c Line Description The name assigned to the AS 400 line description as described in Developing Line Descriptions With CRTLINETH on page 229 Each AS 400 LAN adapter will have its own line description Configuring A TCP IP Host Table Entry Although optional it is recommended that you create a TCP IP host table entry Add the AS 400 name and the IP address of the LAN adapter to the Host Table Entries Also add the hostname and IP address of the printer to the list You can access the host table entries function by using the CFGTCP command then selecting option 10 from the menu You can also add entries to your host table for both the hostname and the fully qualified network name for your system The entry name should match the name you configured for host and domain For example if your hostname is RCHASM03 and your domain name is RCHLAND PTX COM your fully qualified network name is RCHASM03 RCHLAND PTX COM In your host entry table enter both RCHASMO3 and RCHASM03 RCHLAND PTX COM 249 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer 250 Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R2 To configure IPDS on AS 400 V3R2 use the following commands e CRTDEVPRT e CRTIPSFCFG Configuring PSF With CRTDEVPRT On V3R2 This section describes how to create a printer device description 1 At the AS 400 command line enter a comma
128. bout an IP address and subnet mask and has these settings in its current memory However if the NIC is power cycled these settings will disappear unless you store them into flash memory To do this a Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default b At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays click in the field below the IP Address heading and type in the IP address for the NIC 95 96 Chapter 4 Windows NIC Configuration c Under the Subnet Mask heading enter the NIC subnet mask NOTE If you would like to communicate with the NIC from across routers you will need to fill in an entry within the Routing section Please see Communicating Across Routers on page 96 for more details 6 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Communicating Across Routers Since Windows environments rely on TCP IP to communicate with the NIC crossing routers becomes an issue After you have followed one of the NIC configuration methods mentioned most likely you will only be able to communicate with the print server from the same subnet This means any hosts across a ro
129. c Ping Periodic Ping This feature when enabled executes background ping from the print server to its default gateway The operation is executed on every user defined period This mechanism has no TCP traffic from the print server to anything on the network to keep route information alive Since every member in the VLAN is subject to aging from bridging cache a switch or bridge in between may be forgotten in the table at which port the printer was connected If one ping is run from printer server to its default gateway through the switch the switch learns again and the route is seen The problem will not be seen with TCP since the ACKs keep the bridge relearning in a switch Periodically send ICMP Echo Request between a print server and its gateway that is typically situated in the same VLAN and connected with the same switch or bridge The printer server allows a periodic group of ping packets 1 5 to be issued by a set time 1 5 minutes to the gateway value the NIC has from its routing table This feature can be enabled or disabled The default is disable This periodic ping is different from the normal ping process The purpose of this ping is not an attempt at dead gateway detection There is no ping client created in the print server and the ICMP Echo Reply packets received from the gateway are deleted without being processed by the ping client This reduces the processing load on the print server The data size of ICMP Echo
130. cate with the printer however you might receive a successful ping even though the IP address of the TCP IP attached printer is a duplicate of another IP address If PSF is unable to establish a network connection with the TCP IP attached printer or if PSF output for this printer prints elsewhere follow these steps to determine whether the IP address of the printer is unique 1 Turn the printer off 2 Wait at least 5 minutes for TCP IP to clear the Address Resolution Protocol ARP tables If your installation specified a longer interval on the ARPAGE configuration statement in the TCP IP profile you may need to wait longer For information about the ARPAGE statement refer to the TCP IP z OS Customization and Administration Guide 3 Enter the ping command again from the z OS system NOTE If you receive a successful response to the ping command there is a duplicate IP address Consult your TCP IP network administrator 227 Chapter 9 Handling z OS Connectivity Problems 228 10 AS 400 Configuration Overview ASCII Printer This chapter details a complete AS 400 configuration setup including e Developing Line Descriptions with CRTLINETH e Configuring the AS 400 for TCP IP e Configuring the AS 400 for Printing e Verifying Printing from the AS 400 This document assumes no AS 400 printer configuration has been done If any configuration has been done please follow the procedure to the point
131. cate with the unit using npsh exe 1 From a DOS prompt on a Novell workstation begin an npsh session with the unit npsh unitname Starts a Telnet like session with the named print server with guest access only 2 To obtain root access to the unit type supervisor A standard login screen displays prompting you for the login name and password 3 Log in to the unit as root user root NOTE Root users require the use of a password as configured in the unit user list 4 Enter the password If this password is not yet set press ENTER at the password prompt Otherwise enter the password that is already stored in the unit password You are now logged in to the unit as a root user and can access any npsh command on the unit NOTE Because npsh exe makes use of broadcasts you may have problems communicating across a router 165 Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration 166 NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x RPRINTER Setup NIC can be configured to service both RPRINTER NDS mode and PSERVER bindery mode Use the following procedure to set up an RPRINTER form of attachment on a 4 x or 5 x server 1 NIC requires a bindery server login on the 4 x or 5 x as the first step to servicing RPRINTER This bindery login is necessary for registering the NIC Pserver name no bindery queues or printers are set up Using PCONSOLE bindery mode create a bindery printer server object whose name matches that of the NIC at the root context
132. chnical support 273 Chapter 11 AS 400 Troubleshooting 274 Spooled Print File Remains In PND Status Check the output queue with the command WRKOUTQ queuename This typically indicates that PSF 400 is waiting for a response from the printer This can be verified by displaying the OSPL subsystem WRKACTUJOBSBS QSPL If the status of the PDJ job for the printer is SELW then PSF 400 is waiting for a response from the printer Make sure that the printer is in ONLINE mode and that all network connections for example routers between the AS 400 and the printer are active Spooled Files Disappear Without Printing To resolve this problem e Check that the correct printer queue name and correct IP address have been used e Ping the IP address If the ping is successful disconnect the network cable from the printer print server and ping the address again If the ping is still successful there is another printer with that IP address on the network Data Is Being Clipped To resolve this problem you may want to set the PSC Page Size Control parameter to YES in the CRTPSFCFG command V3R2 V3R7 or V4R1 12 z OS Configuration T N3270E Z OS Configuration For A TN3270E Printer The following configuration information shows how a line matrix printer can be configured on z OS and Info Print Server to print TN3270E Modtabs are provided for both an SCS and DSC printer The z OS level is 1 3 These basic con
133. control panel It must be entered as part of this procedure 3 Use the arp command to add an entry into the Unix station ARP table for this NIC Here is the most common syntax for this command arp s ipaddress ethernetaddress Example for Microsoft TCP stacks arp s 192 75 11 9 00 80 72 07 00 60 This example specifies a NIC using IP address 192 75 11 9 and Ethernet address 00 80 72 07 00 60 4 Verify that the ARP entry was properly applied arp a You should see an entry in the listed ARP table with the IP address and Ethernet address specified in step 3 5 Try to ping this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network At this point you should be able to communicate with the NIC from your local Unix station This means the printer knows about an IP address and subnet mask and has these settings in its current memory However if the NIC is shut off these settings will be lost unless you store them in flash memory as follows 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no default password 2 Atthe Network Configuration HTML form that displays click in the field below the IP Address heading and type in the IP address for the NIC 129 Chapter 5 U
134. ct Print Server Configuration from the menu that displays 5 Select Printer Configuration from the next menu to display a list of configured printers 177 Chapter 7 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T 178 6 Select the printer for which you wish to alter the poll time and press ENTER 7 Change the Sampling Interval to the desired number in seconds NOTE You may also want to change the Service mode for forms to Change forms as needed If you do not do this the NIC will need to poll the file server twice as much to get all the information it needs 8 Press ESCAPE and select Yes to save the changes to this new printer 9 Repower the NIC by turning the printer off and on to make the changes take effect Changing The NIC Name NDS And Bindery Setups When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server you must define a new print server to represent the NIC This name must match the predefined name given to the print server By default this name is in the format M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the NIC s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A Make sure that the print server object you are using for your PSERVER setup has the same name as that stored on the NIC If you need to rename the print server object in Netware Administrator delete the object and re create it with the new name Netware Administrator seems to have some probl
135. d during a telnet NPSH session The configuration file is also executed automatically during the power up sequence when DIP switch 1 is closed 3 Embedded NIC Web Page Overview The NIC comes with an extremely powerful printer management tool that allows you to monitor configure and manage both the printer and its print job The NIC comes with an embedded web server that allows System Administrators and users access to its printer management capabilities from a standard web browser The NIC printer s IP address is used as a URL similar to the URL of an Internet web page When a web browser is activated and the printer s IP address is entered the printers embedded web server displays its home page with links to the printers status and configuration settings All of NIC s configuration settings are protected by a password so unauthorized users cannot make changes When you try to open any of the NIC s configuration pages you are asked for your user name and password At the prompt you need to enter root unless you have another user configured with root privileges followed by the associated password If there is no password just press ENTER For more information on setting passwords refer to NIC Security on page 343 After you configure the NIC settings and click the SUBMIT button on the related form re power the NIC to ensure the latest settings are in use To reset the NIC go to the System form under the Conf
136. d Telnet to the NIC adapter from the server console If this is not the case use the printer front panel to configure the NIC adapter before proceeding 1 Click the Start gt Settings gt Printers 2 Double click the Add Printer icon The Add Printer Wizard window displays Add Printer Wizard x This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by All settings will be managed and configured on this computer Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator Back Cancel 3 If necessary select My Computer and click Next 4 Click Add Port 100 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup Printer Ports EES Available Printer Ports Digital Network Port Lexmark DLC Network Port Lexmark TCP IP Network Port Local Port New Monitor Cancel 5 Double click LPR Port If LPR Port is not listed the Microsoft TCP IP Printing service is not installed To install the Microsoft TCP IP Printing service refer to Installing Microsoft TCP IP Printing on page 125 Add LPR compatible printer x Name or address of server providing Ipd Pen sn Name of printer or print queue on that server fat prr Canca Help 6 Enter the IP address of the NIC in the Name or address of server providing Ipd field 7 Enter
137. ddress Also do not add the NIC to the AS 400 TCP IP interface list Configuring With ADDTCPIFC ADDTCPIFC is used to add a TCP IP interface to the AS 400 This step configures the AS 400 for attachments to a TCP IP network At the AS 400 command line enter the following command ADDTCPIFC INTNETADR 9 99 15 188 LIND ETHLAN SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 Your completed screen should look like Figure 27 231 Chapter 10 Configuring AS 400 For ASCII Using TCP IP 232 System BLDD6 Internet address 9 99 15 188 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Line description ETHLAN Line type Elan Interface status Inactive Type of service Normal Maximum transmission unit Lind Automatic start Yes Figure 27 Example of ADDTCPIFC Interface The following parameters must be specified Internet Address Internet address of the AS 400 LAN adapter NOTE Do not use the IP address of the NIC Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask for this AS 400 TCP IP interface for example 255 255 255 0 Line Description The name assigned to the AS 400 line description as described in Developing Line Descriptions With CRTLINETH on page 229 NOTE Each AS 400 LAN adapter will have its own line description Configuring A Router Definition With ADDTCPRTE Configuring A Router Definition With ADDTCPRTE If necessary use the ADDTCPRTE command to create a route definition This is required if the printer is somewhere other tha
138. ded into several menus as shown in Figure 3 Index Home Configuration Status Help About I O Port Network Network Print Path Print Model Log Path TNS250 3270 TCP IP d1prn m1 i diprn 802 11b d2prn m2 12 d2prn Windows d3prn m3 13 d3prn Novell d4prn m4 14 d4prn d5prn m5 15 d5prn d6prn m6 l6 d6prn d7prn m7 I7 d7prn d8prn m8 18 d8prn SNMP Administration System Security Alert Config 1 Alert Config 2 Alert Config 3 Ava cue Applies only to the Wireless NIC with Alert Config 6 Symbol RF cards It is intended to be used rae ait n in infrastructure mode with Kerberos Alert Config 9 enabled Symbol Access Point Alert Config 10 Figure 3 NIC HTML Structure NOTE Online help is available for all HTML pages HTML Forms Printer Status Screen Using the printer IP Address and any standard Web browser you can check the status of the printer Figure 4 shows the exact state of the printer by showing the printer LCD message This screen automatically refreshes every minute 3 170 Port Microsoft Internet Explorer _ Oy x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 222 a A a a 3 8 amp Back Forward Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Mail Size Print Address http 710 224 2 35 ioPonStatus html x Go Links Home Configuration Status Help About LO Port N
139. directly to a host system Following simple configuration steps these peripherals can be simultaneously shared with users on the network whether you are using TCP IP NetBIOS over TCP IP or IPX Novell The NIC package contains an Ethernet Interface to attach itself and the printer to the network The NIC is supplied in one of four forms e an Ethernet adapter attached to the printer parallel port e a wireless Ethernet adapter e an integrated Ethernet card e an integrated wireless Ethernet card Throughout this manual features specific to each NIC type will be indicated by the sideheads ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ETHERNET and WLAN 17 18 Chapter 1 Overview What Special Features Are Available NIC offers an extensive list of features including built in HTML forms for easy cross platform configuration availability of remote management software a detailed and easy to use command shell built in to the firmware multi level configuration security through passwords permission levels and access lists WAN wide communication access numerous printer logging methods e g automatic email to record printer errors and usage remote management through HTML forms Telnet sessions rsh remd remsh commands SNMP and pre defined log methods extensive built in troubleshooting tools built in telnet and ping clients configurable memory usage by disabling protocols and destination services multiple destinations
140. e terminated by agreement between you and Printronix Inc or by Printronix Inc if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty 30 days after notice When this License is terminated you shall return to the place you obtained them the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation U S Government Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY BY USING THIS PRINTER YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT Network Interface Card User s Manual This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or
141. e Host Resource MIB RFC 1514 of September 1993 e Printer MIB RFC 1759 of March 1995 e NIC contains the Standard Printer MIB per RFC 1759 available from www ietf org Information Provided By The MIB The printer MIB contains the following types of information about network printers Descriptions Printer configuration location and contact Status Current operating status of printers Alerts Reportable events from printers General Information About MIBs For further information on SNMP and MIB refer to the following e RFC 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information for TCP IP based Internets SMI e RFC 1156 Management Information Base for Management of TCP IP Internets MIB e RFC 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e The Simple Book An Introduction to Management of TCP IP based Internets SNMP Getting The Latest MIB Information To obtain the latest copy of these and other RFCs FTP the files from one of the following two sources Internet ftp ftp isi edu internet drafts World Wide Web http www ietf cnri reston va us lid abstracts html SNMP SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between manager and agent Managers request information usually through automated polling at specified intervals and agents respond Though used primarily on TCP IP networks SNMP can be implemented on other protocols for example IPX SNMP is a standard by which a
142. e IPDS option on your printer Once configured as an IPDS printer the printer can also print AFP and SCS but these datastreams must be converted to IPDS first NOTE Do not cancel IPDS print jobs by using WebPage cancel Printing AFP IPDS And SCS Files Printers configured as IPDS only print IPDS files AFP and SCS files can be printed but they must be transformed to IPDS before printing e APF files are transformed directly by Print Services Facility PSF 400 an integrated feature of OS 400 which then sends the transformed file to the printer e SCS files are transformed into IPDS by setting the IPDSPASTHR parameter to YES see Figure 32 on page 254 or Figure 33 on page 257 This path yields the best performance by sending IPDS files directly to the printer with no transform 245 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer Requirements Contact technical support to obtain the latest PTFs for PSF 400 For IPDS printing you also need to install the IPDS option for the printer Configuration Checklist NOTE All of the following configuration steps carried out on the AS 400 may require create or change authority 1 If you have not already done so set up the printer and install the NIC See Configuration Using The Control Panel on page 34 2 Using the printer control panel set up the printer for IPDS by setting the parameters and values shown in Table 10 Table 10 C
143. e NIC is not on a Novell network Try adebug nest sap telnet command or find the SAP section on the Novell HTML status page to see if the NIC is seeing any network activity 195 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 196 Try adebug nest pserver telnet command or find the PSERVER section on the Novell HTML status page Look for a valid queue under the EPS QUEUES section If the printer field contains a number and there is a valid file server but no queue then you probably made an error in the setup At this point try again If it is an NDS PSERVER setup look for a line with the following type of message Could not login to NDS Tree lt TREE gt as lt PSERVER lt CONTEXT gt This indicates one of the following the tree is wrong the context stored on the NIC for the print server object is wrong the print server object password is wrong or the print server object name is wrong Try adebug nest rprinter telnet command or find the RPRINTER section on the Novell HTML status page Look for the following type of line 0 ENPReadConfig 0 213 Destination lt X gt where lt X gt is between 0 and 3 If they all read Destination 65536 then the PSERVER setup did not complete properly If there was a valid queue under EPS QUEUES in the debug nest pserver command then the printer name probably does not match an existing destination name on the NIC or Novell has been disabled fo
144. e control panel Press the left arrow until Diagnostics appears Press the down arrow until Printer Tests appears Press the down arrow until Shift Recycle appears Press the left arrow until the following appears for each type of NIC e E Net Test Page or Adapter Test External NIC e Ethernet Test Integrated NIC Press Enter 35 36 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools For T5000e SL5000e printers a Take the printer offline When the printer LCD reads OFFLINE press the down arrow and ENTER keys simultaneously to unlock the control panel Press the key until Printer Tests appears Continue pressing the key until Printer Tests E Net Test Page appears Press ENTER For T5000r SL5000r printers a Take the printer offline When the printer LCD reads OFFLINE press the down arrow and ENTER keys simultaneously to unlock the control panel Press the key until Printer Tests appears Continue pressing the key until Printer Tests Ethernet Test appears Press ENTER For T4xxx printers a Take the printer offline When the printer LCD reads OFFLINE press the down arrow and ENTER keys simultaneously to unlock the control panel Press the NEXT key until DIAGNOSTICS appears Continue pressing the NEXT key until Printer Tests E Net Test Page appears Press ENTER For Laser printers a c d Take the
145. e tcp 3 Close the a TCP IP connection between a TCP IP host and the NIC The TCPindexnumber can be retrieved from debug tcp output ping s hostIPaddress datasize packetnumber Example ping 192 75 11 30 ping another TCP IP host specified by host IPaddress on the NIC network datasize is the datagram packet size which defaults to 64 bytes if no size is included in the syntax and packetnumber is the number of requests to be sent NOTE To use a host or IP name instead of the address you must have set the DNS server on the NIC Use the command set sysinfo dns to do this telnet hostIPaddress escapecharacter Example telnet 192 75 11 35 Start a Telnet session with another TCP IP host specified by host IPaddress on the NIC network If escapecharacter is used it resets the key sequence used to exit the Telnet session It will return you to the telnet gt prompt where you can execute quit Use the keycode command to find out exact escape characters if needed The default character is CTRL NOTE To use a host or IP name instead of the address you must have set the DNS server on the NIC Use the command set sysinfo dns to do this 341 Chapter 15 Complete Command List tn dest destination start stop Example tn dest diprn start Set the tn autoconnect flag temporarily to enable start or disable stop See store tn dest destination autoconnect command for further definition chr lt string gt Echo
146. ed Use list var to see all available variables To erase the trailer send the command with no trailerstring value for example set model m1 trailer Set Commands set model lt model gt config config_num Set a printer configuration number config_num to be loaded prior to printing a job on the specified model If the command is sent with config_num set to 0 the factory configuration is loaded before the job prints If config_num is in the range 1 through 8 the corresponding configuration number is loaded before the job prints To return to the default state where no configuration is loaded send the command with no config_num value for example set model m1 config When no new configuration is loaded the current configuration settings will be in effect for any jobs sent to model lt model gt To see which configuration if any will be loaded at the start of a job use the command list model or list model lt model gt set model from default Set all model settings back to factory defaults set model from stored Set all current model settings to the values stored in flash memory set prn autofd Example set prn autofd Assert or do not assert the AUTOFD line for carriage return insertion This only affects printers that support this function such as impact printers set prn flush Flush the data in the parallel port input and output buffers set prn unlock Release the access lock on the parallel port
147. edia Intervention These are error messages that need some kind of user intervention to solve them Consumable Ribbon Low Toner Low Label Label Present Gap Not Detected 83 Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration Table 8 Alert Groups and Printer Events Alert Group Printer Events Power Cart Recharge Battery Batt High Volt Batt Low Volt RFID RFID Tag Failed RFID Max Retry RFID Comm Error RFID Read Only Tag NOTE Not all of the alerts are available on all of the printers The alerts available for monitoring will depend on the printer type and the options installed on the printer 84 System Information Administration Configuration The Administration Configuration form is broken down into general print server related settings and password security System Information Administration amp System Information NOTE Changes in server name setting only take effect after you reset the IBM 6500 from the System page a Description __ _ Location E Contact sy Printer Serial Number foonssenio02 C lt C lt OS Sysh yS OE Neg 204 191 175 114 Email eg username domain com SMTP server i e g 204 191 175 114 or smtp domain com DNS server eg 204 191 175 114 Figure 18 Administration Configuration System Information The System Information form allows you to specify the foll
148. een 300 seconds and 604800 seconds 7 days The time units cannot be mixed and there must be at least one space between the lt renew_life_time gt value and the time unit s m h or d Default value is 0 311 Chapter 15 Complete Command List WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN 312 Configures the KDC port store kerberos config kport lt kdc_port gt lt kdc_port gt is the 2 byte UPD TCP port used for Kerberos communication Default is 88 Configures the KDC name portion of the service principal store kerberos config kname lt kdc_name gt lt kdc_name gt has a maximum of 127 characters excluding and Default is krbtgt Configures the KDC realm portion store kerberos config krealm lt kdc_realm gt lt kdc_realm gt is usually set to the uppercase name of the Windows 2000 KDC to which the Access Point is configured lt kdc_realm gt has 0 to 127 characters excluding and 7 Default is localrealm Sets the Kerberos password that must match the Windows 2000 user password for the Print Server store kerberos password lt kerberos password gt lt kerberos_password gt is either a string without any space and tab or a double quoted string with a maximum of 40 alpha numeric characters or symbols The administrator should choose at least 9 alphanumeric characters with a combination of upper and lower case characters and symbols In the
149. ees 245 RRQUIFEMEONTS eeeccceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeaees 246 Configuration Checklist eerren 246 Configuring An AS 400 TCP IP Interface With ADDTCPIFG riria eaaa atoia faai 248 Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R2 aaeeea 250 Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R7 And Above 256 Configuring PSF for IPDS On V4R2 And Above 261 Configuring AFP with CRTPSFCFG on V4R3 and Above Optional cccccececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeeeeeees 262 Configuring PSF with CRTDEVPRT On V4R2 and PDOVGs sie tancicertectredt adheeei a eet retest besos a thaciee as 264 Verifying The IPDS Configuration On AS 400 0006 268 Sharing The AS 400 Printer On The Network 008 269 Printer Sharing Parameters rererere 270 Table of Contents 12 13 AS 400 Troubleshooting ccccecceceeeeeeeeteeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeees 273 Cannot PING The Printer ccccssceeesssstceeeseesteeeees 273 PSF 400 Terminates When Initialized ccceee 273 Spooled Print File Remains In PND Status 274 Spooled Files Disappear Without Printing 0 274 Data Is Being Clipped 0 c ceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 274 z OS Configuration TN3270E 275 z OS Configuration For A TN3270E Printer c00 275 Coax Printer Support FMID 0 0 ccceceeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeteaes 275 Program Materials ai nikienda i eas 276 VT
150. eft of the cable connector your DIP switch positions will be reversed and the settings inverted Table 7 10 100Base T DIP Switch Settings Comments up up Normal operation With both DIP switches in the off position the NIC boots up using the settings in flash memory rather than the default settings down up Factory default With the DIP switches in this configuration the NIC boots up and all settings stored in flash memory are erased except the Ethernet address and key value up down Default IP With the DIP switches in this configuration the NIC boots up with factory default settings However the stored settings in flash memory are intact Setting DIP switch 2 to on does not clear any settings stored in flash memory it boots the unit in a different state with the settings in flash memory temporarily ignored down down Reserved This DIP switch configuration is not for customer use 28 Speed Setting for 10 100Base T Speed Setting for 10 100Base T When the router is set to auto negotiation enable the following is the correct behavior of the NIC with each setting 1 10mbps Half Duplex Use parallel detection because the NIC is using force mode and thus has auto negotiation disabled PORs to 10mbps Half Duplex Resets to 10mbps Half Duplex Reconnection at switch maintains 10mbps Half Duplex 10mbps Full Duplex Use parallel detection because t
151. el e g model m1 on NIC for any extra processing associated with the model e Phase 3 the processed print job is directed to the printer for output 19 Chapter 1 Logical Printer Architecture Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 I Destination 1 Model 1 ys d1prn m1 E Destination 2 Model 2 d2prn gt m2 l l Destination 3 Model 3 d3prn m m3 Destination 4 Model 4 ss d4prn m4 l l I I Printer I Destination 5 Model 5 d5prn m5 Destination 6 Model 6 i d6prn gt m6 l Destination 7 Model 7 m dpm gt m7 l Destination 8 Model 8 d8 amp pn m m8 Figure 1 Print Path 20 Destinations Queues Destinations Queues For every I O port on NIC there is at least one pre defined logical print queue or destination to accept print jobs destined for it This includes print jobs that are sent directly to the I O port such as port 9100 These queue or destination names are pre defined but can be changed by the user Models For every destination or queue there is a pre defined model associated with it The model defines how the print job will be processed as it passes through to the printer Models are a set of mini filters that can be used to modify the print data stream The functions available for
152. ely on TCP IP you will need a third party TCP stack loaded onto your Windows station since TCP IP support did not automatically come with Windows until the introduction of Windows NT and Windows 95 You may also be running a third party stack if you decided not to use a Microsoft operating system Some common TCP stacks are FTP Software s OnNet NetManager s Chameleon and Frontier Technologies SuperTCP In each case they allow your Windows 3 1 station to communicate with other TCP IP devices This means you can send print jobs to the NIC as well Technical Support The most common print method offered with Windows TCP stacks is LPR LPD a multi platform remote printing protocol used on everything from PCs to mainframes The LPR print setup is very simplistic involving only two parameters 1 NIC IP address The IP address or host name of the print server to which you want to print NIC destination queue A pre defined name on the print server telling the device to which I O port to send the jobs The standard name for the PRN port is dlprn NOTE This destination name is case sensitive and by default all names are lowercase Windows Troubleshooting Tips This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard Windows and NIC configuration errors Technical Support If you require technical support please have the following information available when you call 1 oa F oO DN Wh
153. ems with renaming objects NOTE Changing the name will affect all of the protocols that are running on the NIC Changing The NIC Name NDS And Bindery Setups HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress adminConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 adminConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the System Information section and enter the new name into the Name field 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver name name 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset 179 Chapter 7 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T 180 Changing The NIC Frame Type NDS And Bindery Setups The NIC allows you to store a particular frame type for the unit to adhere to in a Novell environment HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate wi
154. encryption Authentication Method Select the desired authentication method to be used when communicating with an access point User Enter a user name to be used when authenticating with an access point Currently only used for LEAP authentication Password Enter the password to be used when authenticating with an access point Currently only used for LEAP authentication Windows Network NetBIOS TCP IP TCP IP is used for Windows i e Windows NT Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups printing unless another protocol like IPX is available Therefore mandatory TCP IP settings i e IP address and subnet mask are necessary on the NIC Go to TCP IP Network on this form to fill in these settings if you haven t done so already Windows NetBIOS TCP IP NOTE This setting relies on NetBIOS over a TCP IP Network Protocol M Enable Workgroup Name wo RKGROUP 61 Chapter 3 Network Configuration Workgroup Name This name specifies which Windows workgroup the NIC will reside in Novell Network ADAPTER Novell configuration is supported only on the Ethernet Adapter and WLAN Wireless Adapter ADAPTER Novell Protocol M Enable FrameType Autosense Ethernet I 802 3 C 802 2 802 2 SNAP Service Type auto bindery C nds E File Server Context NDS Preferred Tree Pserver Password Enabled Print Server Name Printer Number Destina
155. ength optional Enter the wireless network name Maximum length of 32 characters Mode Set the mode of operation for the wireless device Pseudo Adhoc and Managed are the available settings 59 60 Chapter 3 Network Configuration Speed Change the selected bit rates Choosing auto will select auto settings even if some or all of the checkboxes are selected To manually choose bit rates change speed option to user and check the appropriate checkboxes If user is selected and no checkboxes are checked then the automatic setting is used Channel Set the RF Channel for the wireless device Selecting Default will ignore user entered value in field and set the RF Channel to the default setting Antenna Choose the antenna type Diverse Primary and Aux are the available settings Preamble Change the preamble length Default Short and Long are the available settings Power Management Mode Change the power management mode and adjust the power save sleep time milliseconds Selecting Off will turn the Power Management Mode off and set the power save sleep time to zero Transmit Power Adjust RF transmit power in percent of full power Options Internation Mode Set the International Mode option Key Change the key used for WEP encryption Ascii Hex Format Ex 01234 56789 abcd ef01 2345 6789 Windows Network NetBIOS TCP IP Default Key Change the default key number used for WEP
156. ents This keeps documents which are sent in rapid succession together as if they were copies of the same document A higher value improves the likelihood of collation but impacts performance Default 500 321 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 322 store tn from default current Example store tn from default Store all tn default settings or current settings to flash memory so that they are retained after power up Set Commands These settings alter the current or working settings in memory only Therefore they will be lost if the NIC is power cycled To ensure this does not happen issue a save command so the current settings get written to flash memory set dest lt dest gt name lt new_name gt Example set dest dlprn name laser Change the current name of the lt dest gt to a new name as indicated by lt new_name gt These names are case sensitive set dest lt dest gt backchannel prn Example set dest dlprn backchannel prn Establish a return path for printer feedback for a given destination lt dest gt The NIC I O port is bi directional however you will most likely use the same I O port to which the destination is currently sending jobs set dest lt dest gt alternate lt alt_dest gt Example set dest diprn alternate d4prn Sets an alternate destination for a queue other than itself set dest lt dest gt model lt model gt Example set dest dlprn model m4 Associate a model with a destination Jobs
157. epower the print server to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method T Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt At the prompt enter store pserver novell fserver add fservername where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you want to add as a preferred file server This adds the specified file server as a preferred file server on the NIC Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset 173 Chapter 7 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T Removing Preferred File Server HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and remove the name of the preferred file server from the File Server field 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the print server to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print serv
158. er telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell fserver del fservername where fservername is the name of the Novell file server you want to remove as a preferred file server 4 Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect reset 174 Setting Password Security NDS And Bindery Setups Setting Password Security NDS And Bindery Setups Besides the general security measures a Novell setup provides further password security A password can be set on the NIC and within your PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator setup so that when the NIC tries to login to the file server the passwords are compared To set the password on the Novell host for use ina PSERVER setup you will need to Netware 4 x and 5 x 1 Log in to Netware Administrator on your Novell host as a user with security equal to Admin 2 Double click on the print server object you are using for your setup This will bring up the print server objects details page Click the Change Password on the Identification page At the prompts type and retype the new password Press OK when you are finished 5 Proceed to the next section to store the password on the NIC Netware 3 x 1 Log into PCONSOLE on your Novell
159. er it on However with a new print queue setup on a Novell file server there can be mandatory settings needed on the NIC Optional Additional settings are available to fine tune the NIC s Novell functionality These options include NDS Context The NDS context in which the print server object was created If you create the printer server object in a different file server object from the file server you logged into then to ensure the absolute path you must activate the NDS context NDS Tree The NDS tree the print server object was created in This is only needed if your environment uses more than one NDS tree Mode The mode the NIC will run in This can be auto bindery or NDS The default is auto so that the NIC can autosense which mode it should run in See NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x RPRINTER Setup on page 166 for information on what to do when using both bindery and NDS file servers at the same time ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER Using HTML Forms e Preferred File Server In a bindery setup this specifies the file server that the print server object was created on In an NDS setup this specifies a file server s that the print server object resides on Since NDS is distributed most administrators will not know which file server s the print server object is actually stored on so in most NDS environments this option is not used For additional information about these options see Novell Configuration For 10 100Ba
160. er type e g T5000 P5000 L5520 is the model of your printer A completed screen looks like Figure 32 PSF configuration printer type Library QGPL User resource library JOBLIBL IPDS pass through YES Activate release timer NORDYF Release timer SEC15 Restart timer IMMED SNA retry count 2 253 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer 254 Delay time between retries 0 Blank page YES Page size control NO Resident fonts YES Resource retention YES Edge orient NO Remote location Name or address 128 99 12 134 TCP IP port 5001 TCP IP activation timer 170 PSF defined options Text description printer_type Network Printer Device resource library list DFT Figure 32 Example CRTPSFCFG Command V3R2 3 The following parameters are required a PSF Configuration PSFCFG The name of the printer device you are configuring b Library Specify QGPL c IPDS pass through IPDSPASTHR To print SCS files specify yEs PSF 400 transforms SCS into IPDS before printing Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R2 Activate release timer ACTRLSTMR Specifies the point at which the release timer RLSTMR is activated Set to NORDYF This means that the release timer is activated when there are no spooled files in the printer s output queue with a status of RDY and the last page of the last spooled file processed has printed NORDYF is used so that all files wi
161. er via Telnet in the wired LAN 49 50 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools 3 Once logged in use the Telnet commands to set up the wireless LAN parameters e g SSID 103 operating mode Infra Structure mode etc that match the Access Point configuration In addition to the normal wireless LAN parameter settings use the following commands to enable Kerberos on the wireless LAN interface and Kerberos for authentication minimum settings 4 Set the wireless LAN interface parameters to enable Kerberos store kerberos opts auth 5 Set the Kerberos parameters to enable Kerberos authentication The Kerberos password must match the Windows 2000 user password for the Print Server The administrator should choose at least 9 alphanumeric characters with a combination of upper and lower case The following is a suggestion for creating strong password for computer security Make sure the password e is at least seven characters long The most secure passwords are seven to 14 characters long e contains characters from each of the following groups letters uppercase and lowercase numerals and symbols all characters not defined as letters or numerals i e amp etc The kname is default to krbtgt which is the default name used in Windows 2000 KDC It must be configured to match with the KDC if the default is changed The krealm is case sensitive it must match the Access Point s realm HTML Forms
162. ermanent IP address and subnet mask and disable RARP BOOTP and DHCP However if your network requires one of these you should clear the IP address and possibly the subnet mask fields and ensure that the appropriate check box is selected Routing The routing table tells the NIC which router or gateway to use to access other subnets or hosts In most situations you can simply add your router s IP address as the default router All packets destined for other subnets will be forwarded to the default router for delivery to the destination host If you have more complex routing requirements add static routing entries for specific hosts or networks in the remaining Routing rows Packets with IP addresses that match a given Destination and Mask from the first two fields in a Routing row will be routed to the router gateway named in the third field Packets which do not match any of the listed Destinations and Masks will be routed to the default router if one is set 802 11b 802 11b 802 11b Q Network Name Mode managed Speed auto 01 O02 05 5 1111 Mbs auto is default if no options selected Chamel Default O 0 0 15 Antenna diverse Preamble default v Power Management Mode Off v Transmit Power 100 0 100 Options International Mode Hex O String Default key disable v Key Authentication Method open v User Password Network Name L
163. erred NDS Tree NDS Setups 183 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T eeeee 184 NDS PSERVER Setup Netware 4 x 5 X ccceeieeee 185 Bindery PSERVER Setup Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x 187 Table of Contents Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x 045 188 RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 X 04 188 NDPS Configuration Netware 4 11 And Above 191 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T ecseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 194 PSERVER Setup raie a aaia A NAE 194 RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup 197 Printing Related ei iaeiei irakin AEA e EEA ARKAAN EARNERS 199 8 OS 2 Configuration ees 203 OVGIVICW 2 ick setts ite al nad heats ee E 203 Configuring The NIC TCP IP Settings c cceeeeeeeees 203 Mandatory Settings cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeessaes 204 Optional SettingS cceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseneeteeneeene 204 OS 2 Workstation Configuration 204 Using The LPR Command ccceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeteaes 204 Using An OS 2 LPR Print Queue seee 205 TCP IP Access Problem cccccccecceeseeeeeseseeeseneeeteneees 208 9 z OS Configuration IPDS Printer 211 OVEIVIOW E 211 RRQUIFEMEONHS acana aes riia A a 211 Configuration Checklist eeesseeeseeeseeeeeeerrrerreeereeenns 212 Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files 06
164. ership on the spool directory and everything within it Example chmod R g rwX o rX usr spool lpd P5000 chmod R daemon daemon usr spool lpd P5000 5 Start the printer daemon for this new printer Example lpc start P5000 You now have a new printer which relies on LPR LPD to print to a NIC printer Use the following command to test printing Syntax lpr P printername filename Example lpr P P5000 etc hosts NIC Configuration for AIX 4 Before you set up the printer it is good to know the ways a print job can be filtered 1 Standard processing Filtering is done on the printer with no processing on the host 2 Local Filtering Filtering is done on the host Be sure to specify the printer model during install Standard Processing 1 Enter SMIT select devices 2 Select Printer Plotter 3 Select Print Spooling 4 Adda Remote Print Queue 5 Set the type of Remote Printing to Standard processing IMPORTANT NIC Configuration for AIX 4 6 Enter the following Remote printer settings Name of queue any_name user selectable Host Name of Remote Server name in etc hosts file or the NIC IP address Name of Queue on Remote Server Type of Print Spooler d1prn BSD Press the list button and choose BSD Local Filtering 1 Enter smitty mkvirprt ao fF oO DN Add a Remote Print Queue Set the type of Remote Printing to Local Filtering Set the Printer Manufacturer to
165. erver This PSERVER object must have the same name that was used for the NDS setup By default this will be M_xxxxxx where XXXxxx equals the last six digits of the print server s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device e g M_091C1A This PSERVER object does not need any printers or queues assigned to it Also when referencing a Bindery queue in NDS set the Novell Mode on the NIC to auto so that both NDS and Bindery logins are possible See Setting The NIC NDS Context NDS Setups on page 182 RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x This procedure associates an existing PSERVER with a remote NIC acting as a RPRINTER NPRINTER in a Netware 3 x Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x environment It is the PSERVER s responsibility to get jobs from the queue and to pass them off to the NIC acting as the remote printer Unlike a PSERVER setup the NIC does not deal directly with the queues NOTE As a RPRINTER NPRINTER the print server does not use a login ID A non NIC print server such as PSERVER NLM or PSERVER EXE must be running for RPRINTER to operate Also if the NIC loses a connection to a PSERVER it will automatically reconnect when that server becomes available again RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x The following steps assume that you have created a PSERVER object in Netware 3 x Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x and have assigned prin
166. es the print job may have arrived at the printer but might be waiting for a manual form feed If so see Set Commands on page 322 for information on trailer strings e Is the printing mechanism you are using e g CAPTURE NPRINT etc configured to service the appropriate queue e Is the NIC configured as the queue s Currently Attached Server If not make sure you have associated the queue and the printer See Novell Host Configuration on page 158 e Is there a hold on the print job If you select the job from PCONSOLE s CURRENT PRINT JOB ENTRIES change the User Hold or Operator Hold to no 199 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 200 e If you look in PCONSOLE s CURRENT QUEUE STATUS within the PRINT QUEUE INFORMATION menu is the server configured to service entries in this queue It is possible to turn servicing off here If you have followed the suggestions above and are still having printing problems try rebooting the NIC Then either review every step you took when configuring the NIC or try redoing the setup paying special attention to each step explained in Novell Host Configuration on page 158 The Job Prints Incorrectly This category can be broken down into several sub categories such as lost characters garbled data extra banner pages or blank pages at the end of a job However the reason for these mishaps can generally be traced back to the printing mechanism used on yo
167. ess they are saved to flash memory Getting Command Help The NIC command shell provides several online help tools including 2 Command Typing when logged in to the command shell will produce a full list of all available commands Command Prefixes Typing in the first portion of a command will produce an error message showing the correct syntax For example typing in store tcpip will produce a list of all commands that start with this prefix Store Commands Complete Command List This section outlines the entire NIC command set including the command syntax a description and in most cases an example for each command listed NOTE If you see the word ifnumin any npsh commands you should substitute a 1 or 2 unless told otherwise The 1 represents the one network interface e g Ethernet supported The 2 represents the wireless network interface if it exists in the system Store Commands These commands change the settings stored in flash memory and do not affect the current or working settings in memory A power cycle is needed before the stored settings become current store ifc ifnum utp 1i rx Example store ifc 1 utp li Modify the physical UTP interface properties where 1i enables link integrity and rx enables the increased receive threshold store ifc from default Set all UTP settings back to factory defaults store ifc from current Store all current UTP settings to flash memory so they
168. et using the set sysinfo syslog IPaddress command set logpath from default Set all logpath settings back to factory defaults set logpath from stored Set all current logpath settings to the values stored in flash memory set lpd Example set lpd bytecount Set the job control on the file size of a Line Printer Daemon LPD If bytecount is enabled the printer does not allow the LPD client to send a job with an unconventional file size Usually the unrecognized numeric operand in the LPD Receive Data File command attributes to this behavior The print job stream is canceled and its TCP connection is closed Default Disabled set model lt model gt name lt new_name gt Example set model m1 name landscape Change the current name of the model lt model gt to a new name as indicated by lt new_name gt These names are case sensitive set model lt model gt type raw Example set model m2 type raw Set the model type to raw so that it does not process the data passing through it in any way set model lt model gt banner text after Example set model m2 banner text Determine whether a banner page should be added for print jobs passing through the lt model gt mapped destination queue By default banner pages are added to the front of the job If after is set the banner page will come at the end 325 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 326 set model lt model gt stty onlcr descramble xtab lt 1 16 gt
169. etwork pm VO Port B NOTE This page will refresh every minute PRN TO Port Settings Status idle Interface lonline Control mode default z on ONLINE Printer LCD BOWER SAVER MODE Message YO Port Print Jobs Active Queued f E Done e intenet Zi Figure 4 Printer Status Screen 53 54 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools Configuration Alternatives Besides the HTML forms and software provided the NIC internal command shell nosh can also be reached using Telnet Remote Shell and FTP Telnet A TCP IP command that helps configure NIC settings remotely A TCP IP host starts a Telnet session with the print server and logs into the device command shell to alter and view settings Example telnet 192 75 11 9 Remote Shell A TCP IP command that helps configure print server settings remotely A TCP IP host uses this command to remotely execute a single command on the NIC Example rsh spike list prn This command remotely executes the nosh command list prn on the NIC named spike FTP FTP can also be used to configure print server settings remotely A TCP IP host uses FTP to store a file containing 1 or more NPSH commands on the FTP file system The configuration file must be FTP put to the config default defaultCfg file The configuration file can later be executed on demand using the load oem comman
170. fault SNMP read only community name is public and cannot be changed Change the SNMP R W community name with the command set user passwd snmp com name save where com_name is the new SNMP R W community name The default is no R W community name NOTE Changing SNMP community names or access rights may hinder or disable applications that are monitoring your printers 1 5 Commands Command Shell Overview The NIC comes with an in depth command shell called npsh It allows you to manipulate objects like destinations I O ports and models and provides monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities npsh Access Methods There are many ways this command shell can be accessed e builtin HTML forms e a Telnet session from a TCP IP host to the NIC e asingle remote shell command e g rsh remd remsh from a TCP IP host Main npsh Command Prefixes All configurable commands either start with store or set and view commands start with list NOTE If the store prefix is used the NIC must be repowered to make the changes take effect Since store affects flash memory settings only the print server must reset and read the new settings now in flash memory 305 Chapter 15 Command Shell Overview 306 NOTE If the set prefix is used a save command must be executed as well so that the new settings are retained after power cycles Since set only affects the settings in memory they will be lost after a power cycle unl
171. ffect Unix Host Configuration There may be times when you would prefer or have to perform the manual setup steps for a new printer definition There may also be times when you require a less common print solution such as direct socket capabilities This section covers these additional setups Manual System V Host Setup This setup involves any Unix operating system using System V print spooling e g SCO Solaris HP UX DG UX etc This means an interface file is used for each defined printer and in the case of any System V print setup involving a NIC the RSHD protocol is used to transfer data from the host to the print server To manually configure a new System V printer on a Unix station create a dummy device file that acts as a locking mechanism between contending print jobs Syntax touch dev NICname portname where N iCname is the host or IP name of the print server and portname is one of its four I O ports Example touch dev spike prn 133 Chapter 5 NIC Installation on HP UX NIC Installation on HP UX 134 LPR is supported in HP UX Version 9 0 and greater To configure a print queue using LPR issue the following commands NOTE Requires root privilege The default BSD interface file rmodel will be used Syntax lpshut lpadmin pqueue_name mrmodel v dev null orm printer_ ip orpdlprn ob3 lpsched accept queue name enable queue_name queue_name any unique printer name
172. field and then select the destination on the NIC you would like to use for output 189 Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each additional printer you would like to have serviced 8 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3 x Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x file server i e issue a load pserver pservername command on the file server NOTE If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4 x 5 x file server you must specify the pserver name and context for pservername For example load pserver sales ps sales printronix 2 Telnet to the print server telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 You should see a prompt with the NIC s IP address ipaddress root gt 4 Atthe prompt store the RPRINTER settings on the NIC The pservername refers to the existing PSERVER NLM on the file server created in step 1 Syntax store rprinter add pservername printernumber NICdestination An example of an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER NLM called pserver1 and sending jobs to the NIC destination diprn is store rprinter add pserverl 0 dlprn NOTE If itis an NDS pserver enter only the PSERVER name and not the context e g sales ps 5 Phys
173. figurations provided a starting point for users new to printing in this manner NOTE Since Info Print Server IPS treats the TN3270E printer as a COAX attached printer additional COAX feature for IPS is required Coax Printer Support FMID Coax Printer Support consists of the following FMID HPRT100 275 Chapter 12 Program Materials Program Materials A program is identified by a program number and a feature number The program number for Coax Printer Support is 5697 F51 Additional information regarding the telnet server and Info Print Server can be found in the following manuals e For z OS V1R2 and above the TCPIP information can be found in SG24 5227 3 Communications Server for z OS V1R2 TCP IP Implementation Guide e InfoPrint Server Customization Guide S544 5744 03 e InfoPrint ServerOperation and Administration S544 5745 03 1 Look at the JES definition defining and associating printer PRINTER9 with INFOPRINT SERVER PRT9 AND FSSDEF FOR LINE MATRX 06 27 97 MM i PRINTERQ9 CLASS K SEP NOMARK MODE FSS FSS PRINTWAY X PRMODE LINE PAGE WS W Q SETUP NOHALT START NO ASSOCIATE PRINTWAY WITH ITS START UP PROCEADURE FSS PRINTWAY PROC COURWTR AUTOSTOP YES Figure 37 JES Definition Defining PRINTER9 COURWTR PROC IEFPROC EXEC PGM ANFFIEP REGION 3M PARM INV AOP1 z OS4 INV ISTEPLIB DD DSN IPPW PW311 SANFLOAD DISP SHR ANFQUEUE DD DSN ANDREE z OS4 QUEUE DISP SHR IANFMM
174. for the queue in etc qconfig backend usr lib Ipd rembak T50 If the queue was set up for local filtering edit the file usr lib lpd pio etc piorlfb and change the line typeset piorlfb_rbflags to typeset priorlfb_rbflags T50 Printing From AIX Printing From AIX Version 4 0 and higher of AIX offers LPR LPD support for network printing This means to set up a new printer under this operating system you only need to define these two parameters 1 NIC IP address The IP address or host name of the print server to which you want to print 2 NIC destination queue A pre defined name on the print server telling the device to which I O port to send the jobs Most likely you will use diprn for the PRN Printing With FTP Print jobs can also be sent to the NIC using the File Transfer Protocol FTP To do this 1 On your network station change to the directory containing the file you want to print 2 Open an FTP session with the NIC Syntax ftp NICIPaddress Log in as root At the password prompt press ENTER since there is no default password 5 Change to the dest directory Syntax cd dest 6 List the contents of this directory using the dir command and determine which destination queue you would like to send the print job through Most likely you will select d1prn for the PRN port 7 Change to this destination directory Example cd diprn 147 Chapter 5 SCO Setup 148
175. fore a new Kerberos password is needed If the password has not been changed within the renew lifetime a warning message displays in the next logon If the renew lifetime is zero there is no time limit imposed on the password Default 0 seconds no limit Enable Kerberos Authentication This check box is used to enable disable the Kerberos authentication within the Print Server If it is selected the Print Server uses Kerberos to authenticate with the Access Point during its boot up process Default disabled i e the check box is not selected Key Distribution Center KDC Settings KDC Port The TCP port of the Kerberos server Default 88 KDC Name The Kerberos server name Default krbtgt KDC Realm The Kerberos realm in which the Kerberos server the Access Point and the Print Server are operating Default LOCALREALM Clock Skew The maximum time difference allowed between the Kerberos server and the Print Server This has to be the same setting in the Access Point Default 300 seconds Status Credentials Information e Ticket Lifetime The maximum time allowed before the Print Server is required to get a new ticket Default 48200 seconds Credentials Information This section displays the Print Server s principal and its Kerberos ticket credentials after the Print Server has authenticated with the Access Point The Status menu items allow you to view the current status of both
176. fter completing the print setup confirm the following e Have you tried repowering the NIC Wait about a minute before checking if it has logged in and attached to a queue e Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit e Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server If so it cannot service another file server at the same time e Is there an available Netware user license for the NIC to utilize while it acts as a PSERVER Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs in to the Novell file server e When going through the PSERVER setup steps did you name the NIC M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the Ethernet address This is the default format of the unit s name when it is acting as a PSERVER oo NOTE M_xxxxxx must have six digits after the SO if necessary pad out each byte with a zero 0 e Has the NIC s name been changed from its default of M_Xxxxxx and if so have you incorporated this new name into your PSERVER setup e ls there a password set for the print server to utilize when it is logging in to the file server Make sure the NIC s PSERVER password matches that of the PSERVER setup or set both places to no password PSERVER Setup e When setting the NIC up as a PSERVER did you specify a destination on the NIC e g dlprn for the printer name and did you remember this name is case sensitive NOTE NIC destinations are ca
177. ge 69 Printer Configuration The option is available on the Print Model web page Fora description see page 70 Selected Log Path This option defines the log path configuration that is to be associated with the current destination Current Log Path Settings Current Log Path Settings Log Path Type None selected Log Path Port None selected Figure 9 Print Path Configuration Current Log Path Settings Log Path Type The option is available on the Log Path web page For a description see page 71 Log Path Port The option is available on the Log Path web page For a description see page 72 67 Chapter 3 Print Model Configuration Print Model Configuration Print Model Model Settings m1 Name mi Model Type M raw Type none C text Banner Page Position before after Filter I insert carriage return after line feed one one Header String one one 4 4 4 one Trailer String None X one x Printer one Configuration Submit Clear Form Figure 10 Print Model Configuration Name Name of the model The default model names are m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 and m8 Model Type Define what processing if any will be performed on print jobs passing through the associated destination If set to raw the job will not be touched by the network adapter 68 Print M
178. ges on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD Example Press the ONLINE key OFFLINE appears on the LCD Command syntax and examples are formatted as follows The Courier font in boldface indicates commands that you type For example At the prompt type ping ftp CompanyWebsite com Regular Courier font indicates references to command syntax and output For example The tp CompanyWebsite com site is working properly Variable values are shown in italics in command syntax output and in text For example ping ipname The ipname is working properly Notes And Notices Notes And Notices For your safety and to protect valuable equipment read and comply with the notes included in this manual A description follows NOTE A Note gives you helpful information and tips about printer operation and maintenance Printronix Customer Support Center The Printronix Customer Support Center offers technical support with Installation Configuration and setup Operation and supplies loading Specifications of the proper print media ink transport assemblies and ink cartridges Answers to post sale service support questions Call the Printronix Customer Support Center at 1 714 368 2686 in the Americas 31 24 6489410 in Europe Middle East and Africa 65 654841 14 in Asia Pacific or visit the Printronix web page at www printronix com hitp www printronix com public servicessupport default aspx 31 Chapter
179. h password gt This auth password needs to match the password entered in the LEAP Access Point Set the network name SSID store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan ssid lt network name gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN interface lt network name gt is a 1 to 32 ASCII character string Set network mode store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan mode adhoc pseudo managed lt net mode gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt net mode gt is the type of network operation mode adhoc pseudo or managed pseudo stands for pseudo IBSS Proprietary adhoc WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN Store Commands Set transfer rate speed store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan speed auto lt l 2 5 11 gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt speed flags gt are the speeds being selected They are entered as a list of integers separated by space characters The following values are supported 1 for 1Mbps 2 for 2Mbps 5 for 5 5Mbps and 11 for 11Mbps Using the word auto instead of any number will set the card to use automatic negotiation Set channel number store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan channel default lt 1 15 gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt channel num gt selects the RF channel number 1 to 15 used in ad hoc mode The word default will inform the device driver to use
180. h the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and enter the new context in the NDS Context field 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Setting The NIC Preferred NDS Tree NDS Setups Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell context context 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Setting The NIC Preferred NDS Tree NDS Setups The NIC supports Novell environments that have multiple trees If your environment has more than one tree you may want to set a preferred tree By default the NIC will try to log in to each tree it finds until it is successful HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11
181. he NIC is using force mode and thus has auto negotiation disabled PORs to 10mbps Full Duplex Resets to 10mbps Full Duplex Reconnection at switch maintains 10mbps Full Duplex 100mbps Half Duplex Use parallel detection because the NIC is using force mode and thus has auto negotiation disabled PORs to 100mbps Half Duplex Resets to 100mbps Half Duplex Reconnection at switch results in 100mbps Half Duplex 100mbps Full Duplex Use parallel detection because the NIC is using force mode and thus has auto negotiation disabled PORs to 100mbps Full Duplex Resets to 100mbps Full Duplex Reconnection at switch results in 100mbps Full Duplex NIC in Auto mode in 100mbps FD environment Use auto negotiation to the highest common local and remote capability i e 100FD in this case PORs to 100 FD Resets to 100 FD Reconnection at switch remains 100 FD 29 Chapter 1 Conventions Used In This Manual NIC in Auto mode in 10mbps HD environment determined using 10hd hub Use auto negotiation to the highest common local and remote capability i e 100FD in this case PORs to 10HD Resets to 10HD Reconnection at switch maintains 10HD NOTE With parallel detection only speed can be determined The duplex mode sets to half duplex Conventions Used In This Manual 30 All uppercase print indicates control panel keys Example Press the CLEAR key then press the ONLINE key Quotation marks indicate messa
182. he appropriate users have rights to this queue they should be in the group everyone Also you may have to assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone Printing Related If none of these help your situation try the whole setup again Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go through the setup again following each step carefully NOTE After completing a PSERVER set up and before beginning a new set up be sure to reboot the printer Wait at least a minute for the Print Server to login and attach to a queue Printing Related The Job Goes To The Queue But Nothing Prints If nothing is printing first make sure you have a connection to the NIC Please see RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup on page 197 if you are having connection related problems Otherwise consider these points when trying to solve printing problems in a Novell environment e Does the job leave the queue or is it stuck there indefinitely If it leaves properly the problem points to the actual printing mechanism on your Novell system e g CAPTURE NPRINT etc to the print job format or to the printer itself Otherwise review the configuration steps you have already followed e Have you confirmed that you can print from the NIC to the printer and ignore the Novell setup altogether Please see start fox tts loopb prn on page 340 for a good test e Is anything happening on the printer when the print job is sent Sometim
183. he dotted decimal address 222 Verifying a TCP IP Attached Printer on z OS Verifying a TCP IP Attached Printer on z OS To operate a TCP IP attached printer use JES operator commands Starting a TCP IP attached Printer To start a TCP IP attached printer do the following 1 Start TCP IP Power on the printer Start the printer FSA e On JES2 the command is Sprinter name e On JESS the command is VARY printer name ON Stopping a TCP IP attached Printer You can stop a TCP IP attached printer in several ways The preferred method is to first stop the PSF FSA for the printer by entering the following command from the z OS console JES2 Pprinter name JESS VARY printer name OFF CANCEL printer name where printer name specifies the name of the printer FSA Then you can turn off power to the printer To end the PSF FSA for the printer use the JES commands If you are unable to purge or cancel the printer by use of the JES commands enter the following command MODIFY FSSname FORCE printer name 223 Chapter 9 Sharing Line Matrix Printers on z OS Resolving IPDS Printing Problems If you have problems printing do the following e Print an Ethernet Test Page Refer to your User s Manual e Verify that the IPDS service is enabled e Verify the service name e Verify that port number 5001 is being used If you are still unable to print IPDS files contact the support center Sharing
184. hecklist 212 define printer to JES 218 JES spool printer sharing 224 port switching printer sharing 226 printer connection 217 requirements 211 N Name Log Path 71 Print Model 68 Print Path 65 Naming schemes NIC 354 NDPS configuration NetWare 4 11 and above 191 NDS PSERVER setup NetWare 4 x 185 NetWare 5 x 185 NDS setup change NIC frame type 180 change NIC mode 181 change NIC name 178 NIC NDS content 182 NIC preferred NDS tree 183 password security 175 polling time 177 preferred file server 172 NDS Novell Network 63 NetBIOS TCP IP Windows Network 61 368 NetWare 3 x Bindery PSERVER setup 187 no PSERVER connection 169 password security 175 polling time 177 reference a Bindery queue 188 RPRINTER NPRINTER setup 188 NetWare 4 11 and above NDPS configuration 191 NetWare 4 x Bindery PSERVER setup 187 NDS PSERVER setup 185 no PSERVER connection 170 password security 175 polling time 177 reference a Bindery queue 188 RPRINTER NPRINTER setup 188 NetWare 5 x Bindery PSERVER setup 187 NDS PSERVER setup 185 no PSERVER connection 170 password security 175 polling time 177 reference a Bindery queue 188 RPRINTER NPRINTER setup 188 NetWare Version 3 x Pserver setup 158 RPrinter setup 160 NetWare Version 4 x PSERVER setup 163 RPRINTER setup 166 NetWare Version 5 x PSERVER setup 163 RPRINTER setup 166 Network configuration 57 connection 33 NIC cannot be found
185. her IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Suite of protocols that act as the base protocol for the Internet A logical connection point in the software of a TCP host or device When two IP devices talk they establish a socket which consists of a source and destination TCP port number on both ends Command and protocol to establish a terminal connection between two hosts on an IP network Unshielded Twisted Pair A cable used for telephone and computer to computer connections Wide Area Network 361 362 Symbols 10 100Base T RPRINTER NPRINTER setup troubleshooting 197 command 306 Numerics 10 100Base T DIP Switches 28 indicators 24 Network Indicator 25 Novell host configuration 184 Novell NIC configuration 172 Run and Auto Reset Modes 25 speed setting 29 troubleshooting 194 Wireless Network Indicator 26 10 100Base T printing troubleshooting 199 802 11b 59 Antenna 60 Authentication Method 61 Channel 60 Default Key 61 Key 60 Mode 59 Network Name 59 Options 60 Password 61 Power Management Mode 60 Preamble 60 Index Speed 60 Transmit Power 60 User 61 A Access lists TCP 347 Access methods npsh 305 Add preferred file server 173 ADDTCPIFC configuring with 231 ADDTCPRTE router definition 233 Administration configuration 85 AFP file printing 245 AFP with CRTPSFCFG on V3R2 co
186. her parameters In V3R7 and higher these three parameters are ignored when specified in a PSF configuration object since they are specified in a printer device description However you may wish to use a PSF configuration object to specify other parameters such as IPDS passthrough and so on The PSF configuration object created with this command is used by PSF 400 when printing IPDS files only if the object is specified with the USRDFNOBU parameter in the printer device description To configure AS 400 for IPDS printing on V3R7 or V4R1 1 At the AS 400 command line enter a command in the form CRTPSFCFG PSFCFG AFP printer typeNETPRT IPDSPASTHR YES RLSTMR SEC15 TEXT printer type NETWORK PRINTER where printer type e g T5000 P5000 L5520 is the model of your printer Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R7 And Above 2 Acompleted screen looks like Figure 33 PSF Configuration Information PSF configuration printer_typeNETPRT Library AFP User resource library JOBLIBL IPDS pass through YES Activate release timer NORDYF Release timer SEC15 Restart timer IMMED SNA retry count 2 Delay time between retries 0 Blank page YES Page size control NO Resident fonts YES Resource retention YES Edge orient NO Remote location Name or address NONE TCP IP port NONE TCP IP activation timer 170 PSF defined options NONE Text description printer_type Network Printer Device resource library l
187. hernet address found on the configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet Parameters MAC address e When defining anew printer name within PCONSOLE did you use a predefined destination queue rather than a name of your own By default the NIC only recognizes names like diprn All other names will be ignored by the device e Is the NIC in Bindery mode as seen under the list pserver output on the device If servicing only a NetWare 4 x or 5 x file server it must be set to handle Bindery services The default setting is Bindery e Is there an available NetWare user license for the NIC to use while it acts as a PSERVER Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs into the Novell file server e Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the NIC In larger Novell environments the file server identification and connection process can take several minutes If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance 170 7 Overview Novell Configuration For 10 100Base T Interfaces ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER This chapter applies to the Adapter and WLAN Adapter NIC and provides additional information for Novell environments using the 10 100Base T interface including e NIC Configuration This section includes setting the preferred file server setting password security adjusting polling time chang
188. his kind of output happens only with Unix text jobs if carriage return insertion is not incorporated into the print setup The printer may be told to do a linefeed but the Unix job does not specify anything about a carriage return to follow this To fix this carriage return insertion must be enabled somewhere in the print setup The easiest and most common location is on the NIC itself within the appropriate model The feature is called onler and the command syntax is set model modelname stty onlcr save For example if printing to the destination dlprn the associated model is m1 Therefore the command is set model ml stty onlcr save 151 Chapter 5 Unix Troubleshooting Tips 152 No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out Unix text jobs may also have problems outputting the last page of a job especially when the BSD Remote LPD print method is used This means the form feed button has to be pressed on the printer to get this last page out To make this process automatic tell the NIC to handle this task by setting this feature on in the appropriate model The command syntax is set model modelname trailer FF save For example if printing to the destination d2prn the associated model is m2 Therefore the command is set model m2 trailer SFF save For default destination model mappings of the NIC please see NIC Naming Schemes on page 354 TCP IP Access Problem If you can ping the printer
189. ically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect 190 NDPS Configuration Netware 4 11 And Above Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate printer is being serviced The printer should display a message such as Waiting for job At this point the NIC knows to receive any jobs this PSERVER NLM has to send to it through the defined printer NDPS Configuration Netware 4 11 And Above Overview In 1998 Novell released a new printing system designed to make network administration of printers easier and more fully functional This system is called Novell Distributed Print Services NDPS and can be used with Novell Netware 4 11 and above along with the supporting software on clients This section gives high level instructions to install and use NDPS with the printer These instructions assume that you understand NDPS architecture well enough to be able to use these instructions along with Novell s instructions to install NIC into NDPS See Novell s documentation to understand terms not defined here The drivers used with the Printronix printer can be found at www printronix com For a driver to be automatically downloaded to a Windows machine when an NDPS printer is installed the driver must be installed into the NDPS Broker Resource Management Service See Novell s documentation for more information The NIC can be installed into NDPS using the Novell Printer Gateway feature of NDPS
190. idity of the e mail address and the SMTP server address enable the Send Test Message option If the Send Test Message box is checked a test message will be sent to the specified e mail address when the submit button is pressed Alert Groups Alert Groups check to enable l Warning I Offline Alerts l Media Input Media Output Media Path C Marker Alerts Alerts Alerts Alerts Alerts I Cutter Alerts M Bar Code I Scanner Alerts C Intervention 1 Consumable I Label Alerts Alerts Alerts Alerts Power Cart Alerts l RFID Alerts Figure 17 SNMP Alert Groups Configuration Specifies which alert groups are enabled for reporting for this configuration When an alert occurs that is contained in one of the enabled alert groups it will be posted to the specified SNMP manager Unix syslog daemon and or e mail address The following table describes which printer events belongs to which Alert Group Default All alert groups are disabled by default SNMP Configuration Table 8 Alert Groups and Printer Events Alert Group Printer Events Offline Printer is Offline Hold Print Time Out Warning COMM Check Invalid Address CU Time Out CU Not Enabled File System Full File Exist Hex Dump Mode Half Speed Mode Printer Warm Print Head Warm 2B Toner Density Too High 2C Toner Density Too Low Media Input Load Paper Paper Out Time Out Fanfold Paper Empty No Fanfold Paper 63 CutSheet Feeder Fail Cutsheet Pick Miss No
191. ied by CONNINTV until the printer becomes available FAILURE STOP stops the attempt to connect to the printer TIMEOUT Specifies the action that PSF is to take after a timeout when no output is available on JES The DISCINTV parameter specifies the timeout interval TIMEOUT REDRIVE requests that PSF redrive the printer FSA using the value of the MGMTMODE parameter TIMEOUT STOP requests that PSF stop the printer FSA which can then be restarted only by an operator command DISCINTV Specifies the disconnect interval in seconds The value can range from zero through 86400 It is recommended that you set the value to 15 When no output is available from JES for this time period PSF ends the session with the network printer If the value is set to zero PSF does not end the session because of lack of output NOTE PSF supports two other methods of printer sharing which are not applicable to 10 100Base T Ethernet Interface printers VTAM RELREQ is available for printer sharing under SNA Port switching is available for SNA and TCP P attached printers when a printer can support multiple active ports 225 Chapter 9 Handling z OS Connectivity Problems Port Switching Printer Sharing To support printer sharing 10 100Base T Ethernet Interface printers automatically switch among all attached ports serial port the twinax or coax port or the Ethernet network port Basically the printer prints jobs for one port until no new jobs ap
192. ight different TN5250 3270 sessions NOTE The standard Printronix NIC module does not support TN5250 3270 protocol However the TN5250 3270 software is available as an option you can order or as factory installed TN5250 3270 Configuration B Configuration for Print Path d1prn INOTE Changes will only take effect after you reset the WLAN PrintNet Enterprise from the System page Mode TN5250 Click here for TN3270 mode Host ok eg 204 191 175 114 or host domain com Port Device Description SS Message Queue Name QSYSOPR Message Queue Library Pase Device Type BM WSCST Name WSCST Library LIBL Auto Connect Start Auto Connect Click here Submit Clear Form Figure 12 TN5250 3270 Configuration TN5250 Mode 73 74 Chapter 3 1N5250 3270 Configuration TN5250 3270 Configuration amp Configuration for Print Path d1prn NOTE Changes will only take effect after you reset the WLAN PrintNet Enterprise from the System page Mode TN3270 Click here for TN5250 mode ok Host eg 204 191 175 114 or host domain com Port 23 Resource Name Auto Connect Start Auto Connect Click here Submit Clear Form Figure 13 TN5250 3270 Configuration TN3270 Mode Mode Specifies the TN protocol mode for the current configuration Default TN5250 Host IP Specifies the IP address or domain name of the host AS 400 for TN5250 for the current configuration Default
193. iguration Menu and click the REBOOT button 55 Chapter 3 Configuration The embedded NIC Web server gives you the ability to configure the network adapter monitor printer status and to manage print jobs The NIC Web page structure is divided into several menus as shown in Figure 3 on page 52 Configuration 56 The Configuration menu items allow you to configure the settings for the following items e Network this menu item allows you to change the network setting for each protocol TCP IP 802 11b NetBIOS over TCP IP and Netware e Print Path this menu item allows you to change the name of the destination queues and define how the print job will be preprocessed before printing It allows you to select what information to log and to specify the SMTP server s IP address e Print Model this menu item allows you to specify the printer name and model It also allows you to select banner page types filters header and trailer strings and printer configurations e Log Path this menu item allows you to specify the logpath name type and port e TN5250 3270 this menu item allows you to configure the TN5250 3270 settings e SNMP this menu item allows you to configure the SNMP trap manager settings It also allows you to define the printer event types to monitor and the e mail address that should receive alert notifications TCP IP Network e Administration this menu item allows you to define or change
194. in the following steps 7 Select the printer you want to use with PPS and click the right mouse button to bring up a sub menu 8 Select Properties from this menu to display the current settings for this printer 9 Click the Details tab to display the printer port settings 10 Click the Add Port button The Add Port dialog box opens 117 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration 118 11 Click the Other button 12 Click TCP IP Printer Port within the Other list 13 At the next dialog box that displays fill in the host name or IP address of the NIC in the first field 14 Fillin a valid TCP port number on the NIC in the second field The choice is 4400 or 9100 for PRN 15 Click OK when done to return to the Details window You should now see something relating to PPS Port within the Print to the following port field 16 Click OK to close this printer properties window You now have a new network printer which relies on PPS to print remotely to a printer off of the NIC Windows 3 1 Host Setup If you are running Windows 3 1 stations on your network you will need to rely on either TCP IP or IPX to print to the NIC If IPX is used you will have a print queue defined on a Novell file server to which your Windows 3 1 stations will send their print jobs The NIC will then service this print queue as either a PSERVER or an RPRINTER Please see Chapter 5 Novell Configuration for further details If you want to r
195. ing NIC from the Windows station If not refer to NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network on page 120 e Have you used the correct URL for the NIC home page It should be http NICIPaddress e g http 192 75 11 9 e ls HTTP support enabled If not refer to Web Browser HTTP Problem on page 124 Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer Can you ping the NIC from your Windows NT station If not please refer to NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network on page 120 Did you specify the correct IP address or host name for the NIC in the first field of the Add LPR Compatible Printer box Did you specify a valid destination queue on the NIC in the second field of the Add LPR Compatible Printer dialogue box If so did you also enter it in lowercase letters Cannot Browse The NIC On The Network Have you looked under the right Windows workgroup By default the NIC will be found under WORKGROUP Are you able to browse other Windows stations and devices on the network from this same station Has this Windows station been given enough time to update its registry so it can see this newly added workgroup device Sometimes Windows stations can take considerable time depending on the size of the network 121 Chapter 4 Windows Troubleshooting Tips 122 Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output e Is there a large job currently printing which is taki
196. ing the NIC name changing the NIC frame type changing the NIC mode setting the NIC NDS context and setting the NIC preferred NDS tree Host Configuration This section includes NDS PSERVER setup Bindery PSERVER setup referencing a Bindery queue in NDS and RPRINTER NPRINTER setups e Troubleshooting tips This section covers PSERVER setups RPRINTER NPRINTER setups and printing related problems 171 Chapter 7 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T ADAPTER 172 WLAN ADAPTER There are no mandatory Novell settings needed before the print server can be detected on the network However there can be some mandatory settings needed before a Novell print queue can be serviced by the NIC These mandatory settings are covered separately for Netware 3 x 4 x and 5 x under the Host Configuration heading The print server setup in a Novell environment is much simpler than that required in a TCP IP one No addresses masks or router entries are necessary and in most cases the NIC can simply be connected to the network turned on and then configured for printing from a Novell station through PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator However there are some optional parameters you may wish to change such as the preferred file server s print server password polling time frame type print server name NDS context and NDS preferred tree The following sections describe these optional pa
197. installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required You can also ping and telnet to the NIC adapter Print an E Net Test Page to verify the Ethernet settings P5000 T5000e SL5000e T4000 DIAGNOSTICS gt Printer Tests gt E Net Test Page gt Enter P7000 T5000r SL5000r DIAGNOSTICS gt Printer Tests gt Ethernet Test gt Enter L55xx L1524 DIAGNOSTICS gt Test Pattern gt E Net Test Page gt Enter 135 Chapter 5 SCO Setup SCO Setup The default NIC queue name is d1prn however the name can be changed To verify the queue name print an E Net Test Page or telnet to the adapter and run a list dest command NOTE Depending on the shell preceed the character with a to avoid shell script errors 136 1 Login as a root or administrator privileges user 2 Acquire an unused Internet address IP from your Network Administrator and choose a unique name for the NIC adapter 3 Add your NIC Internet address and host name to your system host table by appending the following line to the etc hosts file lt Internet address gt lt host name gt Example 199 230 23 76 salesdept 4 If you have not installed the SCO RLP BSD Ipd package which is part of the TCP IP package run mkdev to invoke the RLP installation script mkdev rip The following screen displays Remote printing configuration Do you want to
198. ion The procedure given is from an OS 2 Warp 4 system but the setup is similar to OS 2 Warp 3 and v2 11 OS 2 must have TCP IP installed on it and be configured with the correct IP parameters See OS 2 documentation help and your network administrator Configuring The NIC TCP IP Settings There are mandatory TCP IP settings e g an IP address and subnet mask needed before the print server can be detected on the network There are also some optional settings for configuring your NIC within an OS 2 environment This section mentions some of the more common optional settings available 203 Chapter 8 OS 2 Workstation Configuration Mandatory Settings The NIC must be configured with an IP address and subnet mask at a minimum Consult your network administrator to obtain the proper values for these parameters Optional Settings One additional setting the gateway address is necessary if the OS 2 workstations must communicate with the NIC across a router Consult your network administrator to obtain the proper value for this parameter To configure these options see Configuration Tools on page 34 OS 2 Workstation Configuration 204 OS 2 must use the TCP IP LPR protocol in order to send print jobs to the NIC This section explains how to use the LPR command and how to set up an OS 2 print queue which will forward jobs to the printer using the LPR protocol Using The LPR Command At an OS 2 command
199. ips 168 This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard configuration errors If you require technical support please have as much of the following information available when you call 1 on oO What level of software are you running What type of attachment do you have What is your host operating system Give a detailed description of the problem When and how often does the problem occur Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your NIC configuration NetWare 3 x No PSERVER Connection NetWare 3 x No PSERVER Connection Was the NIC power cycled after the PCONSOLE steps were completed This will make the print server boot up and realize which print queue and file server it needs to service Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server If so it cannot service another file server at the same time When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE did you use the correct name for the NIC e g M_091C1A By default it only recognizes itself as M_xxxxxx or M302_xxxxx for the Wireless Adapter where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of its Ethernet address found on the configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet Parameters MAC address When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE did you use a predefined destination queue rather than a na
200. isplays on the control panel This process takes approximately 1 to 2 minutes To prevent a loss of NIC configuration information do not change the NIC settings while this message displays When the initialization is complete E NET READY displays and you can safely change the NIC settings from the control panel You need to set both the ethernet and wireless network IP addresses according to the TCP IP environment that the printer is connected to There are four parameters accessed from the printer control panel that are IP address related These parameters are located in the Ethernet Address menu and the Wireless Address menu IP Address This is the host for IP addresses that have four segments They are displayed as SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 and SEG4 which can be set to any value in the range of 0 to 255 e Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask for the host IP that has four segments They are displayed as SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 and SEG4 which can be set to any value in the range of of 0 to 255 Wireless NIC Configuration Using The Control Panel e Gateway Address This is the gateway IP addresses that have four segments They are displayed as SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 and SEG4 which can be set to any value in the range of 0 to 255 e DHCP The DHCP option allows you to obtain host server IP addresses when powering onto the network The DHCP can be configured to e Enable each time you power on the host server automatically assigns
201. ist DFT Figure 33 Example CRTPSFCFG Command V3R7 or V4R1 257 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer 258 NOTE The lines in bold in Figure 33 are not used by PSF 400 Instead PSF 400 uses the information entered in the device description screen 3 The following parameters are recommended a PSF configuration PSFCFG The name used for this PSF configuration object The name must match the user defined object name USRDFNOBJ in the printer DEVD IPDS pass through IPDSPASTHR To print SCS files specify yEs PSF 400 transforms SCS into IPDS before printing Activate release timer ACTRLSTMR Specifies the point at which the release timer RLSTMR is activated Set to NORDYF Release timer RLSTMR Specifies the amount of time to wait before a session or dialog is released without terminating the writer The ACTRLSTMR parameter specifies when this timer is to be activated Set the parameter to a value at least equal to the TIMEOUT value on the printer The recommended value is SEC15 Configuring PSF With CRTDEVPRT On V3R7 And Above This section describes how to create a printer device description 1 At the AS 400 command line enter a command in the form CRIDEVPRT DEVD printer type DEVCLS LAN TYPE IPDS MODEL 0 LANATTACH IP AFP YES PORT 5001 FONT 11 FORMFEED CONT RMTLOCNAME 128 9 12 134 USRDFNOBJ AFP 5000NETPRT PSFCFG TEXT printer type
202. izard click Finish lt Back 21 Click Finish If you have any problems during or after installation see Windows NT 4 0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems on page 125 Digital Signature Not Found x The Microsoft digital signature affirms that software has been tested with Windows and that the software has not been altered since it was tested The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature Therefore there is no guarantee that this software works correctly with Windows Printers If you want to search for Microsoft digitally signed software visit the Windows Update Web site at http windowsupdate microsoft com to see if one is available Do you want to continue the installation No More Info 112 Windows XP 2000 Host Setup 22 If the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box opens click Yes to continue the installation The Current Emulation dialog box opens Current Emulation X The Printtronix P5000 printer is set on delivery to use LP protocol by default Please select the default protocol in use If your are not sure please select LP LP or PGL 7 1c Gey YGL ANSI 23 If necessary select the emulation you want to install and click OK 24 Click OK to confirm correct printing 113 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration Windows NT 3 51 Host Setup To configure a new printer on a Windows NT 3 51 station 1 Open the
203. job You can specify up to three separate sequences per trailer string The Ethernet Interface executes them in order from top to bottom If specifying fewer than four sequences be sure to start at the top leaving undefined fields at the bottom 69 70 Chapter 3 Print Model Configuration The most common sequences are listed on the form e PCL Reset tells the printer to reset itself once the data completes e End of Transmission EOT tells the printer to force the end of the job e Formfeed tells the printer to do a formfeed at the end of the data Printer Configuration Specify a printer configuration number to be loaded before processing the print job This ability to associate a printer configurations to a logical printer model allows you to define up to eight unique and independent printer personalities in a single printer Using this feature you effectively have eight different printers in one To associate a printer configuration to the currently selected destination queue just select the desired printer configuration number from the drop down list Once a printer configuration has been associated with a destination queue any print job sent to that destination queue name will cause the printer to load the associated printer configuration before processing the print job Log Path Configuration Log Path Configuration Log Path amp Log Path Settings 11 Name I1 I job I user I io port Logpath Type
204. kConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays search for the Windows NetBIOS TCP IP section and highlight the Workgroup Name field Type in the new workgroup name for the NIC Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new settings take effect 97 Chapter 4 Windows NIC Configuration Changing Destination Names When defining some printers within Windows environments the NIC requires that you specify a predefined destination rather than any name you would like For example when creating a new printer under Windows NT a screen similar to Figure 21 displays Add LPR compatible printer x Name or address of server providing Ipd EEEE Name of printer or print queue on that server fai pir Cancel Help Figure 21 Windows NT Print Setup Dialogue Box The first field requires the IP address for the NIC and the second field must be filled in with a valid destination from the print server e g d1prn Otherwise LPR will not be able to access the printer Table 9 outlines the default destinations to choose from Table 9 NIC Default Destinations Destination Mapped I O Port d1prn PRN d2prn PRN d3prn PRN d4prn PRN
205. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DSC PRINTER LU_3 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LU3PRT MODEENT LOGMODE LU3PRT FMPROF X 03 TSPROF X 03 PRIPROT X B1 SECPROT X 20 COMPROT X 3080 X SSNDPAC X 00 SRCVPAC X 00 RUSIZES X C7C7 X PSNDPAC X 80 PSERVIC X 03800000000018502B507F00 X 278 TCPIP Configuration With TN3270E TCPIP Configuration With TN3270E The following is the portion of the system s TCPIP configuration involved with TN3270E printers Define the VTAM parameters required for the Telnet server BeginVTAM PRTGROUP PGRPLU1 RMT2 ENDPRTGROUP PRTGROUP PGRPLU3 RMT3 ENDPRTGROUP IPGROUP TESTPRT 9 99 98 62 ENDIPGROUP IPGROUP TESTPRT3 9 99 98 67 ENDIPGROUP PRTMAP PGRPLU1 TESTPRT GENERIC PRTMAP PGRPLU3 TESTPRT3 GENERIC End telnet printer section EndVTAM NOTE Only additions required for the TN3270E printers are shown 279 Chapter 12 Program Materials Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E The following screens show areas of the Printer Inventory Manager involved with the definition of the TN3270E printers 1 At main panel select option 4 to look at the FSS definition InfoPrint Server Printer Inventory Manager Option gt Printer Definitions 1 Add Add a printer definition 2 List List printer definitions 3 Select Select printer definitions to list Other Func
206. l language 1 1 English 2 Japanese Trace mode 1 1 None 2 Internal 3 No printing 4 Full Trace prompt Trace table size 4 Next look at the printer definition for the DSE LU_3 printer in the printer inventory 5 Select option 2 from the Printer Inventory Manager main panel to list the printers 282 Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E Command gt Scroll gt HALF Actions A Add B Browse C Copy D Delete E Edit X Chg type A Printer Name Type Description Location DEST FORMS LU Name PRT717 PSF LINEMATRIXIPDS B5lab PRT717 Y B VTAM_DSE1 IPPW A TN327E Pri IMPACT LAB K VTAM_SCS1 IPPW A TN327E Pri IMPACT LAB J VTAM_SCS2 IPPW L kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Bottom of data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 6 While browsing VTAM_DSE1 notice that the DSC printer is defined to IPS as a COAX attached printer Browse IP PrintWay Printer Definition Command gt Printer definition name VTAM_DSE1 Description A TN327E Printer using the DSE LU_3 Datastream extend Location IMPACT LAB extend Component name Custom values Section enter to browse enter to browse Allocation gt gt 283 Chapter 12 Program Materials 284 Processing gt NetSpool options NetSpool end of file IP PrintWay options Protocol gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Use DEST CLASS and FORMS for IP PrintWay printer selection
207. l variations of Unix Printing can come from multiple hosts directly or through central spooling machines 127 Chapter 5 Unix NIC Configuration Unix NIC Configuration 128 There are mandatory settings needed before the print server can be detected on the network as well as some additional optional settings This section offers alternative methods for configuring your NIC and mentions some of the more common optional settings available Mandatory Since TCP IP is used the NIC must be configured with a minimum of an IP address and subnet mask before it can be seen on the network To configure these options see Configuration Tools on page 34 Optional Additional settings like routing entries can be configured allowing for communication across subnets Configuration of the NIC can be done from the control panel or through host commands To configure these options see Configuration Tools on page 34 Using ARP To configure the Ethernet Interface with its TCP IP settings using a manual arp command the syntax is arp s ipaddress ethernetaddress For the aix command the syntax is aix s ether ipaddress Mac_address To use either of these commands 1 Log on to a Unix station as superuser or root This station must be located on the same subnet as the NIC since ARP is limited to subnets Using ARP 2 Find the Ethernet address for the NIC by printing a configuration or reading it from the
208. le length is transmission data rate dependent The short preamble is 50 shorter than the long preamble Transmit power is 0 100 It must match the Access Point s preamble configuration Power Mgmt This option allows you to set power save mode and sleep time A value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided If set to zero power save mode will be disabled e Transmit Power This option allows you to specify the power level used by the wireless card to send network packets to the access point Transmit power is specified as a percentage of full pwer 0 100 e Internat Mode When enabled the Wireless option adapts to international frequency requirements in Europe e Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface The options include Open Shared Kerberos and LEAP 43 44 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools e Default WEP Key The default key must match the Access Point s configuration If the Access Point is configured to use Open System the default key should be set to 0 If the Access Point is configured to use 40 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key the encryption key must be set to the same setting as the Access Point s setting See the following section on how to set up the encryption key In addition there are four keys 1 4 that an Access Point can use If the Access Point is set to use key 1 the default key must be
209. ll pre defined variables including any newly created ones Any of these defined variables can be referenced in a string by placing a before the variable name e g set model m1 trailer FF list dhcp List all DHCP information for the NIC provided that DHCP is enabled list lpd List the Line Printer Daemon LPD information such as weahter the bytecount is enabled or disabled Miscellaneous Commands These commands do not fall under any specific section of the command shell but they are used quite frequently save default Save the current settings to flash memory so they are available after power cycles Sysinfo destination model logpath variable user and I O port settings will be saved If default is specified as well factory settings will be saved overwriting any new settings you have configured reboot Perform a warm boot or hardware reset to simulate a power on reset This restores current settings to those stored in flash memory since the flash memory settings will be read and loaded into memory upon bootup reset Perform a warm boot or hardware reset to simulate a power on reset This restores current settings to those stored in flash memory since the flash memory settings will be read and loaded into memory upon bootup load default Load the settings stored in flash memory and use them as the current or working settings If default is specified as well factory settings will be loaded 339 Chap
210. llel printer status messages PORT Where this log information will be sent to The choices are a TCP port number e g 2000 an email address including an alias ora central host running a SYSLOG daemon To view the current logpath settings on the print server 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP or using Telnet e g Telnet ipaddress The command to view the logpath settings is Syntax list logpath NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress destConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 destConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default Downloading Software Through The Network Interface Card NIC 3 At the Print Path Configuration HTML form that displays select a destination link e g d1prn from the top of the page to bring up the appropriate destination form Once the desired destination HTML form displays scroll down to the Logpath Type and Logpath Port sections to view the current logpath settings for this particular destination At this point you can alter any of these settings and then click on the SUBMIT button to store them into the NIC
211. lt string gt or redirect lt string gt to an I O port using the chr lt string gt ioport keycode Determine the hexadecimal value for a key to be used as the escape character with the NIC built in telnet command Help Lists all available commands 342 1 6 Extra Features NIC Security There are TCP access lists available to restrict host connections with the device Users And Passwords The NIC supports two user types root Access to everything within the print server including all configurable settings guest Ability to list settings only Passwords can be set for each user type However most often you will just set a password for the root user to protect the NIC configuration Guest users cannot alter the print server configuration in any way To configure a root password on your NIC 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP The commands to set a root password are Syntax set user passwd username password save Example set user passwd root your _password_for root save 343 Chapter 16 NIC Security 344 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress adminConf html1 e g http 192 75 11 9 adminConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the user ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 At the Administration Configuration HTML
212. lt msgqlib gt Example store tn dest dlprn msgqlib LIBL Store the queue library to which system messages will be logged Default LIBL Store Commands store tn dest lt dxprn gt WSCSTname lt WSCSTname gt Example store tn dest dlprn WSCSTname NONE Store the queue name to which system messages will be logged Default NONE store tn dest lt dxprn gt WSCSTlib lt WSCSTlib gt Example store tn dest dlprn WSCSTlib LIBL Store the queue library to which system messages will be logged Default LIBL store tn dest lt dxprn gt autoconnect Example store tn dest dlprn autoconnect Store the state of the autoconnect flag If the autoconnect flag is enabled the NIC tn client will attempt a connection and binding with the specified tn host automatically on power up This connection sequence will be repeated every 60 seconds until successful or the autoconnect flag is disabled See tn dest lt dxprn gt start stop command Default disabled store tn dest lt dxprn gt copytimeout Example store tn dest dlprn copytimeout 1000 Store the value of the copytimeout When consecutive TN5250 3270 jobs are sent to the NIC they are treated differently depending how soon they arrive In an attempt to provide a perception of collation when multiple copies are sent from one host if the time between jobs is less than the copytimeout value then they are treated as copies and the job is given precedence over other host docum
213. me KHH KRN ERE KRN Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish Cancel 13 Click Finish The Add Printer Wizard window appears Add Printer Wizard Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use gf Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation fi disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet S00SF v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 1000 xl AGEAAceuSot INNNGE wh 2 Have Disk lt Back Cancel 108 Windows XP 2000 Host Setup 14 Click Have Disk NOTE If you do not have the printer driver files go to www printronix com to download the files Locate File 2 x Look in Sy P5000 J ck My ear i KS My Network Pa File name P5K INF z Files of type Setup Information inf Cancel 15 Click Browse and locate the files NOTE The figure above shows the installation of the P5000 printer driver 109 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration Add Printer Wizard Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model determine which printer to use Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed con
214. me of your own By default the NIC only recognizes names like diprn All other names will be ignored by the device Is the NIC in Bindery mode as seen under the list pserver output on the device If servicing only a NetWare 3 x file server it must be set to handle Bindery services The default setting is Bindery Is there an available NetWare user license for the NIC to use while it acts as a PSERVER Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs into the Novell file server Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the NIC In larger Novell environments the file server identification and connection process can take several minutes If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance 169 Chapter 6 Novell Troubleshooting Tips NetWare 4 x and 5 x No PSERVER Connection e Was the NIC power cycled after the PCONSOLE steps were completed This will make the print server boot up and realize which print queue and file server it needs to service e Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server If so it cannot service another file server at the same time e When defining anew print server within PCONSOLE did you use the correct name for the NIC e g M_091C1A By default it only recognizes itself as M_xxxxxx or M302_xxxxx for the Wireless Adapter where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of its Et
215. meter a table of values for name type banner config and the size in bytes of header and trailer are shown for all models m1 through m8 When the model parameter is supplied the specific bytes used in the header and trailer are shown along with the banner type data type and configuration number for that specific model 337 Chapter 15 Complete Command List ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER 338 list mosinfo List the MOS version list net List all current TCP IP network settings e g IP address and subnet mask list pping List all the current periodic ping setting list pserver List the current general print server settings e g print server name and Novell mode Novell parameters are listed on ADAPTER and WIRELESS NICs only list prn List the current parallel port setting e g mode list rprinter List any current RPRINTER definitions list snmp List the Trap Table containing SNMP Managers list sysinfo List the current NIC system information e g contact name and protocol stacks enabled list tcpip List all current TCP IP network settings e g IP address and subnet mask list test List the status of output tests on the I O ports list tn List all current tn protocol settings list uptime Lists how long the NIC has been up and running from the last reset list user List the current user definitions e g user names and types Miscellaneous Commands list var List a
216. mines the type of print job and printer logging needed per job One logpath is associated with every destination Line Printer Daemon The most common TCP IP remote printing protocol that crosses all hardware utilizing IP Machine Address Code Management Information Base A set of variables database managed by an SNMP manager application Defines how a print job should be processed e g banner pages added ASCII to PostScript conversion as it passes through the NIC One model is associated with every destination Network Basic Input Output System Common interface among PC networks Refers to the condition of the NIC with no configuration or IP address loaded Extensive built in command shell within the NIC Portable Document Format Encodes different types of documents enabling them to be read across multiple platforms 359 360 Persistent DHCP ping print path protocol PSERVER RAM RARP When this option is enabled the IP Address Gateway and Subnet Mask obtained through DHSP is saved If the DHCP server does not provide an address the device will use the previously saved DHCP IP address This option only works when DHCP is enabled The default disable Standard command to test a TCP IP connection e g ping 192 75 11 9 Three stage path a print job takes when it is sent from a host to a printer through the NIC A set of rules or conventions governing the exchange of information
217. mode is NOT set by the TN5250 data stream It is only set through the front panel This is true regardless of the front panel TN5250 Host Override setting 299 Chapter 13 Font Identifier FONT Help 300 14 Monitoring Printers Implementing Printer Management Printer management includes the following tasks e Monitoring the status of network printers e Responding to alarms e Gathering statistics on printer operations The three elements of network printer monitoring and management are e Agent manager model e The management information database MIB e SNMP the protocol used to get management information Agent Manager Model The elements of a monitoring system MIB and SNMP are implemented in an agent manager model e The MANAGER is a console workstation or server on working hubs or routers which has a global knowledge of NICs and printers e AGENTS are utilities that reside on devices such as a NIC that respond through SNMP to management requests for information The information is stored in an MIB 301 Chapter 14 Implementing Printer Management 302 MIB An MIB contains information a device makes available through SNMP The MIB is a management information base that describes information about actual objects to be managed and controlled Standards Of Network Printer MIBs The Printer MIB is based on the following standards e System and Interfaces Group MIB RFC 1213 of March 1991
218. mote printing using the Line Printer Daemon Ipsched System V printing using the Ip command rprinter Novell s remote printer setup pserver Novell s PSERVER setup netbios Printing from Windows stations relying on NetBIOS over TCP IP ftpd printing using the File Transfer Protocol FTP tn5250 3270 configuration print path using tn5250 3270 sessions 65 66 Chapter 3 Print Path Configuration Selected Model Defines the model configuration that is to be associated with the current destination The default model names are m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 and m8 Current Model Settings Current Model Settings Model Type raw Type none Position before Filter None selected Header String None selected Trailer String None selected Printer Configuration None Selected Log Path 1 cp cB cu cB C1 cn cig Figure 8 Print Path Configuration Current Model Settings Model Type The option is available on the Print Model web page For a description see page 68 Banner Page The option is available on the Print Model web page For a description see page 69 Filter The option is available on the Print Model web page For a description see page 69 Current Log Path Settings Header String The option is available on the Print Model web page For a description see page 69 Trailer String The option is available on the on the Print Model web page For a description see pa
219. n a name if not an existing printer to this printer Select Remote Other Unknown at the Type field Click Escape to save the changes Click Escape until you are back at the Print Server Configuration menu Select Queues Serviced by Printer to display a list of defined printers Select the printer you just defined and press ENTER At the list of queues that displays click Insert to add a queue to the list Select the queue defined and press ENTER When prompted for a priority press ENTER to select the default or select a priority Click Escape until you have exited PCONSOLE Reload the PSERVER NLM that the NIC is to service as an RPRINTER Repower the NIC by turning the printer off and then back on Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate printer is being serviced The PSERVER should indicate that the printer is Waiting for job At this point the NIC knows to receive any jobs this PSERVER NLM has to send to it through the defined printer NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x PSERVER Setup NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x PSERVER Setup NIC destinations are case sensitive and will not be recognized if they are typed incorrectly By default they are all lower case If you are setting up a NetWare 4 or 5 environment the destination must be renamed to uppercase to match the PCONSOLE entry The NIC can be used in a NetWare 4 or 5 environment with either of the following options e Set the
220. n on a local segment and must cross bridges Configuring A Local Domain And Hostname The AS 400 print commands described in Setting Up Printing For ASCII Files on page 234 require a local name and hostname If you have already configured LAN attached TCP IP printers on the AS 400 system you will have a local domain name and hostname configured on the system NOTE If you already have a local domain name and hostname configured on the system do not change your setup If the local domain name and hostname file is empty the file must be set up This control file information is used to determine if a print request comes from an authorized host To configure the local domain and hostname you will run the CFGTCP command and select Option 12 from the menu Enter a local domain name such as city company com Enter a local hostname such as as400 01 This is the name of your AS 400 system and must match the hostname for your system in the host entry table Refer to Configuring A TCP IP Host Table Entry for more information NOTE If the printer and AS 400 are not on the same local LAN segment use CFGTCP Option 2 to verify that there is a route defined in the TCP IP route list Configuring A TCP IP Host Table Entry Although creating a TCP IP host table entry is optional it is a good idea to take this step Add the AS 400 name and the IP address of the LAN adapter to the Host Table Entries 233 Ch
221. nd in the form CRTDEVPRT DEVD printer type DEVCLS RMT TYPE IPDS MODEL 0 AFP YES AFPATTACH APPC FONT 11 RMTLOCNAME TCPIP FORMFEED CONT TEXT printer type NETWORK PRINTER Where printer _ type e g T5000 P5000 L5520 is the model of your printer 2 Acompleted screen looks like the example shown in Figure 31 which starts on the next page Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R2 Display Device Description Device Description Option Category of device Automatically created Device class Device type Device model Advanced function printing AFP attachment Online at IPL Font Identifier Point size Form feed Separator drawer Separator program Library Printer error message Message queue Library Maximum pending requests Print while converting DEVD OPTION DEVCLS TYPE MODEL AFP AFPATTACH ONLINE FONT FORMFEED SEPDRAWER SEPPGM PRTERRMSG MSGQ MAXPNDRQS PRTCVT printer type ALL PRT NO RMT IPDS YES APPC YES 011 NONE CONT FILE NONE INQ QSYSOPR LIBL YES 251 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer Print request timer PRTRQSTMR NOMAX Form definition FORMDF F1C10110 Library LIBL Character identifier CHRID SYSVAL Remote location RMTLOCNAME TCPIP Local location LCLLOCNAME NETATR Remote network identifier RMTNETID NETATR Mode MODE QSPWTR Dependent location name DEPLOCNAM
222. network manager can get statistics and configuration information from the NICs and other devices on the network This is done through a Network Management Station NMS such as NetView Monitoring Tools Many tools can be used to monitor printers with SNMP agents One of these tools is NetView There are also other MIB browsers which are not described here OS 2 TCP IP To get SNMP EXE to work correctly to browse MIB items you may need to delete the following file d mpitn etc mib2 tb 303 Chapter 14 Monitoring Tools 304 Monitoring With AIX NetView 6000 The AIX NetView 6000 program can manage any IP addressable device with an SNMP agent NetView 6000 can be used to set a network topology monitor a network diagnose problems and measure network performance Through its MIB Browser information about the resources affecting an event such as an alarm can be obtained The Remote Management Software The remote management software utility is a versatile and dynamic program It allows you to organize all of the printers in your office remotely in a single database download software and printer settings from a host computer with a single mouse click and use a virtual operator s panel to configure printers in the same room or on the other side of the world Refer to Remote Management Software User s Manual or www Printronix com for more details on this tool Setting The SNMP Community Name The de
223. nfiguring 253 Agent model printer monitoring 301 AIX 4 NIC configuration 144 AIX NetView 6000 monitoring 304 AIX printing 147 AIX remote queue time out setting 146 Alert groups 80 Alternatives configuration 54 Antenna 802 11b 60 ARP Unix 128 AS 400 automatic remote output queue 236 configuring as an IPDS printer 245 configuring for ASCII 231 configuring for printing 234 CRTLINETH 229 hostname 233 363 Index IPDS configuration checklist 246 local domain 233 network sharing 269 printer sharing parameters 270 printing AFP files 245 printing IPDS files 245 printing SCS files 245 remote printer queue name 234 TCP IP access problem 242 TCP IP host table entry 233 troubleshooting 273 verify IPDS configuration 268 verify printing 240 AS 400 ASCII HTTP problem 244 troubleshooting 241 AS 400 troubleshooting cannot PING the printer 273 clipped data 274 PSF 400 terminates when initialized 273 spooled files disappear without printing 274 spooled print file remains in PND status 274 ASCII configuring AS 400 231 setting up for printing 234 Authentication Method 802 11b 61 Auto Connect TN5250 3270 76 Auto reset mode 25 364 Automatic remote output queue AS 400 236 B Back Channel Print Path 65 Banner Page 69 Banner Page Print Path 66 Bindery PSERVER setup NetWare 3 x 187 NetWare 4 x 187 NetWare 5 x 187 Bindery setup change NIC frame type 180 change NIC mode 18
224. ng up all of the printer resources Usually when printing from Windows 95 98 stations a busy printer can cause Windows to display a printer error message This is because it demands immediate printer attention rather than holding the data until the printer is ready again The best way around this is to use a central spooling station like an NT server e Have you tried restarting the spooler under Control Panel Services Sometimes this is needed to get printing started NOTE As a last resort you may want to reboot the Windows station Sometimes this is the only option to completely clear this situation The NIC usually has nothing to do with this problem TCP IP Access Problem If you can ping the printer from a workstation but you cannot Web browse Telnet or print to the printer through the NIC there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list In order for this workstation to use the NIC interface in this case one of two things must happen e The TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this workstation or e All entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations hosts access to the above TCP services To view the current access list use the printer control panel to access the configuration menu see the User s Manual for configuration menu information From the DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests menu choose the E Net Test Page When the page prints look under the TCP ACCESS TABLE sec
225. nges save The user snmp is now created and snmppassword is the only community string which will allow write access Set Commands set snmp manager lt index gt lt ipaddress gt lt trap community gt The NIC continuously generates traps To set the NIC to send traps to a particular SNMP manager use this command to add an SNMP manager to the trap table lt index gt is the index number of the trap table lt ipaddress is the IP address of the SNMP manager receiving traps lt trap community gt is the community string sent along with the trap information set snmp trapport lt index gt lt udp_port gt Set the UDP port number in the SNMP trap manager table This value should correspond to the port number monitored by the SNMP manager application running on the host at the IP address specified in the set snmp manager command lt index gt is the index number of the SNMP trap manager table lt udp_port gt is the desired UDP port number Acceptable values are 162 and 49152 through 65535 set snmp trap lt index gt active Enable or disable an SNMP trap manager table entry The index is the index number of the SNMP trap manager table active enables the table entry active disables the entry set snmp emailaddr lt index gt lt emailaddress gt The NIC can also send SNMP alert messages to a desired e mail address To specify an e mail address to send alert messages to use this command to add the e mail
226. nix NIC Configuration 130 3 Under the Subnet Mask heading enter the NIC subnet mask NOTE If you would like to communicate with the NIC from across routers you will need to fill in an entry within the Routing section Please see Communicating Across Routers on page 132 for further details 4 Click the Submit button when done and physically repower the print server to make sure the new settings are in effect Using RARP RARP allows you to dynamically assign an IP address to the NIC upon bootup To configure the NIC with its TCP IP settings using RARP 1 On your RARP server make an entry in the etc ethers file for the NIC Syntax ethernetaddress NICIPaddress Example 00 80 72 07 00 60 192 75 11 9 Start the RARP daemon on the RARP server if not already running If it is running send an HUP signal to it with the kill command Syntax kill HUP pid where pid is the process ID of the RARP daemon Power on the NIC so that it immediately sends out an RARP request Wait one minute to allow the address assignment process to complete You should see the STAT LED on the NIC interface slow down indicating it knows about an IP address to use Using BOOTP 4 Try to ping the NIC IP address from a local Unix station to see if it can be seen on your network NOTE You will only be able to communicate with the NIC from a network station on the same subnet as the print server The NIC needs t
227. nter performs an interface hardware test The presence of the ETHERNET PARAMS menu selection at the printer control panel indicates that the NIC hardware is functioning properly See the User s Manual for configuration menu information If you have trouble pinging the printer 1 Verify the configuration of the AS 400 including the printer and any intervening devices such as routers and bridges 2 Verify that the AS 400 line description is varied on and the printer is turned on and displays an ONLINE status 241 Chapter 10 AS 400 ASCII Troubleshooting ADAPTER 242 WLAN ADAPTER 3 Verify that the AS 400 TCP IP is active TCP IP Access Problem If you can ping the printer from a workstation but you cannot Web browse Telnet or print to the printer through the NIC there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list So that the workstation can use the NIC in this case one of two things must happen e the TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this workstation or e all entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations hosts access to the above TCP services To view the current access list use the printer control panel to access the menu See the User s Manual for configuration menu information From the Operator Print Test menu choose the Ethernet Test Page When the page prints look under the TCP ACCESS TABLE section for the TCP access list entries To add delete a T
228. o be told about a default router gateway so any packets that come in from a different subnet can be returned via this gateway Please see Communicating Across Routers on page 132 to set this up Using BOOTP BOOTP allows you to dynamically assign an IP address to the NIC upon bootup In addition the BOOTP server can provide additional details like a default router gateway address To configure the NIC with its TCP IP settings using BOOTP 1 On your BOOTP server make an entry in the etc bootptab file for the NIC Syntax NICIPname sm netmask hd homedirectory bf null gw defaultgateway ht ethernet ha ethernetaddress ip ipaddress ts timeserver to timezone Example spike sm 255 255 255 0 hd usr null bf null 9w 192 75 11 1 ht ethernet ha 008072070060 ip 192 75 11 9 ts 192 75 11 7 to 25200 131 Chapter 5 Unix NIC Configuration 132 2 Turn the NIC on so that it immediately sends out a BOOTP request Wait one minute to allow the IP address assignment process to complete You should see the STAT LED on the NIC interface slow down indicating it knows about an IP address to use 3 Try to ping the NIC IP address from a network station to see if it can be seen on your network NOTE You will be able to communicate with the NIC from network stations on different subnets if the print server has been told about its default router gatew
229. ode to auto HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and go to the Service Type field to select the appropriate mode 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect 181 Chapter 7 Novell NIC Configuration 10 100Base T 182 Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell mode nds bindery auto 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Setting The NIC NDS Context NDS Setups The NIC allows you to store the print server object in any context within the NDS tree you choose By default the NIC will look for the print server object in the same context as the file server object it connects to is stored in HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate wit
230. odel Configuration Banner Page Tells the Ethernet Interface to produce a banner page with each print job The type of banner page data can be text You can also specify whether the banner page should come at the front or the end of a print job Filter Specify whether the Ethernet Interface is to add carriage returns to print jobs passing through that contain solitary linefeeds This is common with Unix text jobs resulting in stair stepped output Header String Define an escape sequence to be sent to the printer before each print job For example you may want to send a sequence to print the job in landscape mode or to a certain tray on the printer You can specify up to four separate sequences per header string The Ethernet Interface will execute them in order from top to bottom If specifying fewer than four sequences be sure to start at the top leaving undefined fields at the bottom The most common sequences are listed on the form e Print landscape tells the printer to print in landscape mode e Print portrait tells the printer to print in portrait mode Trailer String Define an escape sequence to be sent to the printer after each print job For example you may want to send a sequence to add a formfeed so you don t have to manually press the formfeed button on the printer You may also want to tell the printer to reset itself in case you have set a header string which tells the printer to do something special with the
231. one 3 Use cmd DSPYSYVAL QCHRID This is the system language code page available 4 Use cmd WRKTCPSTS IFC to deterimine the IP address of the AS 400 This value is used in setting the NIC TN5250 devices User Supplied Values User Supplied Values Host For this session use the IP value from step 4 above Device description This is the name of the virtual device Auto connect e If true enabled then queue and device automatically attach e If not true disabled the command tn dest dxprn start stop allows individual sessions to start or stop NOTE Leave other values at their default descriptions Example of telnet session commands store tn dest d8prn host 192 168 168 34 store tn dest d8prn devicedesc palletform store tn dest d8prn autoconnect reset This example creates a device queue named palletform on the AS 400 host with IP 192 168 168 34 The NIC adapter initiates the connection each time it is reset or the printer power is cycled Using Telnet Commands for TN5250 Command List The following commands for TN5250 are available via a Telnet session with the Network Interface Card NIC Store Commands store tn dest lt dxprn gt host lt IPaddress gt store tn dest lt dxprn gt port lt portnumber gt store tn dest lt dxprn gt devicedesc lt devicename gt store tn dest lt dxprn gt msgqname lt msgqname gt msgqlib lt msgqlib gt store tn dest lt dxprn gt WSCSTname lt WSCSTname
232. ontrol Panel Settings Menu Item Setting C T PORT Port Type Twinax TWINAX Twinax Type IPDS 256 or IPDS 1024 SETUP 3 Set TCP IP addresses for the printer such as an IP Address Gateway Address or Subnet Mask See Configuration Tools on page 34 4 If the printer and AS 400 are not on the same LAN segment verify there is a route defined in the TCP IP route list If necessary use the ADDTCPRTE command to create a route definition You need this if your printer is somewhere other than on a local segment You need the IP address of the NIC to configure the NIC If you have not done so yet create a line description for your NIC See Developing Line Descriptions With CRTLINETH on page 229 246 Configuration Checklist Create or verify the existence of an AS 400 TCP IP interface for NIC See Configuring An AS 400 TCP IP Interface With ADDTCPIFC on page 248 The next step depends on your AS 400 release Configure your printer with one of these procedures e Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R2 on page 250 e Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R7 And Above on page 256 Notice that when the IPDS feature is installed the queue name d4prn is not available Verify the printer is ON using the VFYCFG command Verify that TCP IP has been started using the STRTCP command Test your configuration See Verifying The IPDS Configuration On AS 400 on page 268
233. orkstation with one of the following commands PING ip address or PING hostname where ip address is the Internet address of the remote system printer the NIC and hostname is the hostname you defined for the printer if any e If the ping is not successful refer to Cannot PING The Printer on page 273 e If the ping is successful vary on the printer device description with the command VRYCFG printer device CFGTYPE DEV STATUS ON To use PSF 400 to send an IPDS file to the printer enter STRPRIWTR DEV printer device where printer device is the name of the printer Sharing The AS 400 Printer On The Network 7 If you have problems printing do the following e Print an Ethernet Test Page Refer to your User s Manual e Verify that port number 5001 is being used 8 If you are still unable to print IPDS files contact technical support Sharing The AS 400 Printer On The Network To support printer sharing your printer automatically switches among all attached ports serial twinax coax LAN Basically the printer prints jobs for one port until no new jobs appear and the port times out The printer then switches to the next port and does the same thing To change the default time out value for a port update the TIMEOUT value for the port on the appropriate menu Serial Interface Ethernet Parameters Twinax Interface or Coax Interface 269 Chapter 11 Sharing The AS 400 Printer On The
234. ort ASCII899 NO Image configuration IMGCFG NONE Character identifier CHRID Graphic character set SAME Code page User defined options USRDFNOPT SAME for more values User defined object USRDTATFM Object NONE Library Object type Data transform program USRDTATFM NONE Library User defined driver program USRDRVPGM NONE Library 298 Font Identifier FONT Help Text description TEXT Device created for S1045PXM Workstation customizing object WSCST NONE Library Figure 41 Example of CHGDEVPRT Command Font Identifier FONT Help Specifies the font identifier used by the 3812 3816 and 5219 printers including ASCII printers emulating the 5219 printer and the IPDS printers The Printer Font Table Font Parameter in the CRTDEVPRT command lists the valid font identifiers the display values the characters per inch value implied with each font style a description of each font style and whether the font is supported on a particular printer NOTE Some fonts may be substituted by the printer Consult the various printer reference guides of details The possible values are e identifier Specify the 3 4 or 5 digit identifier associated with this printer e point size Specify a point size ranging from 0 1 through 999 9 If you do not specify a point size the system will set one e SAME This value does not change The print quality typeface setting in TN5250
235. ot warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free Printronix Inc reserves the right to make changes and or improvements in the Software without notice at any time 2 INNO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX INC BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT EVEN IF HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 3 Printronix Inc will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement 4 Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence for the Software Product covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement 5 California law governs this Agreement Termination of License Agreement This License shall continue until terminated This license may b
236. owing section can be found by either telnet ing to the NIC and issuing the commands given or launching a browser to the Novell status page on the NIC e g http 192 168 11 9 networkNovellStatus html Try doing a debug nest ipx telnet command on the NIC or find the IPX Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Check that a board has been bound to the NIC and that the network number is correct for your network If not set a specific frame type for the NIC to use You can find out what frame type is bound to which board number using the debug nest odi command or from the ODI Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Try adebug nest sap telnet command or find the SAP section on the Novell HTML status page to see if the NIC is seeing any network activity Try adebug nest rprinter telnet command or find the RPRINTER section on the Novell HTML status page Look for an entry for one of the numbers 4 to 7 under ENP INFO The dest field should match the destination used on the NIC If no entry is found check that the destination has the Novell service enabled If the ERROR CODE field has an error of 308 make sure no other RPRINTER setup is servicing this printer object at the same time Only one RPRINTER connection is allowed to service a PSERVER NLM printer If the NIC has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the queue there may be a permission problem Make sure t
237. owing information about the printer 85 86 Chapter 3 Administration Configuration Name Name given to the print server in Novell and Windows environments The defaul name is P_xxxxxx or M_xxxxxx where XXxxxx equals the last six digits of the network adapter s Ethernet address e g P_01001C and M_031C1A respectively For the WLAN Adapter the default name is M302_xxxxx where xxxxx equals the five digit adapter serial number Description Optional field to help identify the printer s features and capabilities Location Optional field to help identify the printer s physical location Contact Optional field to help identify the individual or group responsible for the printer Printer Serial Number Allows the user to enter the printer serial number The field is blank by default NOTE If the user has not entered a serial number through one of the NICs depending on the printer type the printer may use its internal serial number from EEPROM If EEPROM is blank i e no serial number on the board it will use the MAC address of the embedded NIC embedded wireless NIC or external NIC respectively as the printer s serial number Syslog Specifies the IP address of a host running the SYSLOG daemon NIC debugging or printer logging information can be sent to the IP address System Information Email Defines the user email address to receive printer and job logging information from log
238. paths on the NIC Default Unconfigured empty SMTP Server Specifies the IP address or domain name of the SMTP server to be used for processing email messages generated by the NIC Default Unconfigured empty DNS Server Specifies the IP address of the domain name server to be used for resolving host names e g host domain com to IP addresses e g 192 168 0 42 Default Unconfigured empty NOTE If the DNS server field is initially blank the NIC will automatically use the IP address of the DNS server and enter it in the DNS server field when DHCP is enabled 87 Chapter 3 Administration Configuration Passwords Passwords NOTE Reauthorization is necessary after changing a password Root Password Old New Confirm Guest Password Old New Confirm Figure 19 Administration Configuration Passwords Only a user with root privileges can alter the NIC s settings Guest users can only view settings but cannot alter them Both types of users can be assigned passwords To change a password type in the old password in the Old field Then type the new password twice once in the New field and once in the Confirm field Default No passwords for root or guest users 88 System Configuration System Configuration System Q NOTE The following actions will immediately shut down all services on the WLAN PrintNet Enterprise and reset the unit Reboot This will reboot the
239. pear and the port times out The printer then switches to the next port and does the same thing To change the default time out value for a port update the TIMEOUT value for the port on the appropriate menu Serial Interface Ethernet Twinax Interface or Coax Interface Handling z OS Connectivity Problems If you encounter problems when ping ing a network printer from z OS here is how to resolve them Ping is Not Successful If the ping is not successful verify the following e The printer is powered on e The IP address is unique in the TCP IP network If the IP address of the z OS system is not unique see your network administrator to resolve the IP address problem e The Maximum Transmission Unit MTU size of the IP packet for the z OS system is equal to the MTU size of the printer For information about the values recommended for the z OS system see Modify the TCP IP Profile in z OS on page 214 To change the MTU size for the z OS system change the GATEWAY statement in the z OS TCP IP profile and restart TCP IP to pick up the changes You cannot change the MTU size on a 10 100Base T Ethernet Interface printer The MTU size is fixed at 1024 bytes If these items are all in order consult your TCP IP network administrator about a possible network problem 226 Ping is Successful Ping is Successful A successful ping usually indicates that the z OS system can communi
240. pha Windows NT 4 0 PPC Windows NT 3 5 or 3 51 x86 Windows NT 3 5 or 3 51 MIPS x lt Back Cancel 12 Determine if the printer is shared with other network users If it is shared select the share name and operating system s of the other workstations that may use this printer 13 Click Next 14 Click Finish Printing a test page is recommended If you have any problems during or after installation see Windows NT 4 0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems on page 125 103 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration 104 Windows XP 2000 Host Setup This installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required In addition the administrator can ping and Telnet to the NIC adapter from the server console If this is not the case use the printer front panel to configure the NIC adapter before proceeding 1 For Windows 2000 select Start Settings gt Printers For Windows XP select Start Printers and Faxes 2 For Windows 2000 double click the Add Printer icon For Windows XP click Add A Printer The Add Printer Wizard window displays 3 Click Next Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer ls the printer attached to your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer Local printer
241. printer offline When the printer LCD reads OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL press the up and down arrow keys simultaneously to unlock the control panel For L5520 and L5535 printers press the right arrow until TEST PRINT appears For the L1524 printer model press the right arrow until DIAGNOSTICS appears Press the down arrow until Test Patterns appears Press PREV to display E Net Test Page Press ENTER IMPORTANT CAUTION Configuration Using The Control Panel 5 Verify the current NIC firmware version number NOTE Firmware exists within the NIC and the printer itself Each firmware is a separate entity with its own version number Please pay close attention to the type of firmware referenced in the remaining sections of this document The NIC version should be 1 1 3 or higher for 10 100Base T Ethernet adapters If the NIC version is current skip to step 6 below If the NIC version is not current you need to update both the NIC and printer firmware If you need to update the printer firmware you must do so now After the update is complete you must restart this instruction from the beginning Your printer s User Manual includes instructions for upgrading the printer firmware The process of upgrading the printer firmware will automatically upgrade the NIC firmware to the appropriate level The NIC firmware is updated only when the current printer firmware is loaded via the network interface The
242. printing requests Please enter the printer name q to quit diprn Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer r l r Please enter the name of the remote host that d1prn is attached to salesdept Printer diprn is connected to host salesdept Is this correct y n y If salesdept currently runs SCO OpenServer Release 5 or above it can support the extended remote printer protocol Do you want to turn on the extended RLP protocol support flag If you re not sure answer n y n n n Would you like this to be teh system default printer y n 141 Chapter 5 SCO Setup 142 If it is the system default then all jobs submitted without a printer name will go to this printer If it is not the system default it must be specified when printing Type y or n and press Enter or Return The printer is now installed and ready to print 6 Froma shell prompt use this command to test the printer 1p dprint_name file name where print_name is the name of the printer you created and file_name is the name of an appropriate file to test print Troubleshooting This installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required In addition the administrator can ping and telnet to the NIC adapter from the server console NOTE If this is not the case use the printer front panel or the IPAssign utility to configure the NIC adapter before
243. proceeding Manual LPR LPD Host Setup Manual LPR LPD Host Setup The NIC also supports Unix operating systems which follow a BSD print system e g SunOS 4 1 x This means a printcap file is used to define all printers available on the host and interface scripts are not commonly used Instead LPR LPD printers are defined To manually configure an LPR LPD printer on a BSD Unix system 1 Define an entry for this new printer within the printcap file etc printcap Syntax printername sh pw 80 mx 0 rm NICname rp NICdestination lp sd usr spool lpd printername 1f usr spool lpd printername log af usr spool lpd printername acct where printername is any name you would like to give to this new printer NICname is the host or IP name of the print server and NICdestination is one of the pre defined destinations queues on the device Example P5000 sh pw 80 mx 0 rm spike rp diprn lp sd usr spool lpd P5000 lf usr spool lpd P5000 1log af usr spool lpd P5000 acct Create the spool directory specified by the sd entry in the printcap entry for this printer Example touch usr spool lpd P5000 Create the log and account files specified by the 1 and af entries in the printcap entry for this printer 143 Chapter 5 SCO Setup 144 Example touch usr spool 1pd P5000 log touch usr spool 1lpd P5000 acct 4 Change permissions and own
244. prompt enter lpr s ip address p NIC queue filename where NIC_queue is the name of an existing destination queue on the NIC and it must be lowercase by default You will most likely use dlprn If the IPDS feature is installed queue name d4prn is not available Troubleshooting Check the IP information on both the NIC and the OS 2 station for correctness Make sure the N C_queue is actually defined on the NIC and that you are spelling it correctly Using An OS 2 LPR Print Queue Using An OS 2 LPR Print Queue This section describes how to set up an OS 2 Warp 4 print queue to print to the NIC using the LPR protocol TCP IP for OS 2 must be installed on your OS 2 workstation This procedure is similar to OS 2 Warp 3 and v2 11 To set up the printer queue 1 Find the Printer template icon It may be in the Printers folder or the Templates folder 2 Right click on the icon then select Install The Create a printer dialog box displays 3 Enter any desired name for the printer This will be the name of the printer queue 4 Inthe Default printer driver list select the desired driver If the desired driver does not appear in the list click on Install new printer driver and follow the instructions to install the desired driver 5 Inthe Output port list double click on an unshaded PIPE LPDx port If all are shaded double click on a shaded port and change the parameters If no PIPE LPD
245. queue is created and placed in the Printers folder or on the OS 2 desktop 12 Make sure LPRPORTD is running Press Ctrl Esc and check the list for a line that contains LPRPORTD If it is running this process is complete If it is not running enter the following at the OS 2 command prompt start lprportd You will probably want to put this command in your STARTUP CMD file or use the TCP IP Configuration tool to set it to autostart on bootup Any print jobs sent to this queue will now be forwarded to the NIC Using An OS 2 LPR Print Queue Starting The LPR Port Daemon The LPR Port Daemon must be started to enable TCP IP printing To start the LPR Port Daemon 1 Open the TCP IP folder which is in the OS 2 System folder for Warp 3 0 2 Open TCP IP Configuration 3 Select the Autostart tab on the notebook 4 In Services to Autostart select Iprportd 5 Select Foreground Session and Minimized 6 Close the notebook by double clicking the system icon which is located in the upper left corner 7 Select Save If prompted press Yes to save the configuration changes 9 Atthe OS 2 command prompt enter tcpstart to restart TCP Troubleshooting Check the IP information on both the NIC and OS 2 station for correctness Make sure the value in step 8 of Using An OS 2 LPR Print Queue is actually defined on the NIC See Configuration Tools on page 34 to de
246. queues for versatile printer manipulation and distinct print setups header and trailer strings to instruct printers on font pitch printing etc flexible naming conventions automatic network connection and frame type sensing simultaneous printing across all I O ports and all supported protocols multiple network protocol support Logical Printer Architecture Logical Printer Architecture The NIC implements a logical printer architecture which gives the system administrator the possibility to configure the print server to handle and act upon the print data in several ways When a print job comes through the print server there is a certain logical print path that it follows before it gets to the printer Each logical print path consists of a sequence of logical steps where extra processing may be performed on the print data before it is sent to the printer This ability to preprocess the print data before it is sent to the printer allows elimination of certain printing problems or implementation of printer enhancements that may be difficult and time consuming to solve or introduce at the system spool or queue level The preprocess ability is also simplistic to perform at the print server level The logical print path for a print job going through NIC consists of three different phases e Phase 1 the host sends the job to a destination or queue on NIC e g diprn e Phase 2 the print job passes through the associated mod
247. r that destination If there is a valid Destination line then double check that there is an entry for this number under the ENP INFO section NOTE Debug messages for the PSERVER setup are in the RPRINTER section here because the PSERVER setup on the NIC shares some code with the RPRINTER setup Try a debug nest logs telnet command or find the General Messages section on the Novell HTML status page Look for a valid entry for the printer It will look something like this 0 InitSinglePrinter printer lt X gt name lt NAME gt Then look for the following lines 0 Printf RemoteMonitor lt X gt printer is and 0 Printf WAITING_FOR_JOB If you see these lines the NIC is set up properly and the problem points to a setup issue on the workstation RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup If the NIC has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the queue there may be a permission problem Make sure the appropriate users have rights to this queue they should be in the group everyone Also you may have to assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone Did you rename any objects in Netware Administrator during your setup Netware Administrator seems to have a problems renaming objects If so delete everything and start over If none of these solutions help your situation try the whole setup again Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go through the set
248. rameters Preferred File Server NDS and Bindery Setups In a bindery setup the preferred file server specifies the file server on which the print server object was created In an NDS setup it specifies a file server on which the print server object resides Since NDS is distributed most administrators will not know which file server s the print server object is actually stored on so in most NDS environments this option is not used This feature is useful in a large Novell network so that the NIC does not ignore important file servers If you are setting up the NIC to work with a Bindery file server it is a good idea to set a preferred server on the NIC To view which file servers the NIC does acknowledge at a given time use the debug nest fserver command For more information see Complete Command List on page 307 Preferred File Server NDS and Bindery Setups Adding Preferred File Server HTML Method 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default Look under the Novell section and add the name of the preferred file server in the File Server field Click SUBMIT when done and physically r
249. reate 7 Click the right mouse button on a branch in the tree in which you would like to create a printer object 8 Select Create from the pop up menu The New Object dialogue displays 9 Select Printer from the Class of new object list and click OK 10 Type the name of the printer in the Printer name field NOTE The Printer object name must match one of the destination names on the NIC Most likely this will be d1prn 185 Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T 186 In NDS a printer object can only be attached to one print server object at a given time because Novell uses the printer object to represent a physical printer A physical printer can only be attached to one parallel or serial port at a time Thus if you assign a printer object to another print server object the new print server object will take it from the old one this also happens with non NIC print server objects To properly process print jobs sent to the NIC the printer object created in Novell must refer to the destination on this server and not to the actual physical printer On the NIC print jobs must pass through an extra layer a destination before being sent on to the printer If you are using multiple print servers you will have to either rename all your destinations to ensure that no printer object names conflict or keep all the printer objects for one print server in a different context than those for the other print se
250. reerrrserrerrrssresns 128 Mandat aen aa AA a AAE iai 128 Optina a aaae Rat ae e aar a a eee Moat 128 USPEO ARP rrai aE a A E 128 Using RARP acce nac anina ie den E 130 Using BOOTP resinas aaia ae aaa eaa aena 131 Communicating Across Routers 132 Unix Host Configuration cccccecccesesceeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeteeees 133 Manual System V Host Setup ccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 133 NIC Installation on HP UX esseseesseesrsesrserrrserrrerrresreens 134 Solaris 2 6 7 NIC Setup cc cceccceeeesseeseeeeeeeneeeteneeeeeaees 135 SCO Setups vce ae A a eee ee 136 Manual LPR LPD Host Setup ccecseeseeeeeeteeeeeees 143 NIC Configuration for AIX 4 144 AIX Remote Queue Time Out Setting eeeees 146 Printing From AIX ccccccececseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeseeneeeeeeenaees 147 Printing With FTP cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Direct Socket Printing 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 148 Unix Troubleshooting Tips cceeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaees 149 NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network 149 Nothing Prints secaosneacorecnni eane aei 150 Stair Stepped Output seseseseeesereeereeeenestrnsrrnrernesrrnsren 151 No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out 005 152 TCP IP Access Problem 152 Front Panel Message Dynamically Set Params Redd Only s2isiccs secirtsncel cca cot stcaeetasestpeet alec iat dans clot eerie es 154 Table of Contents
251. riesrrsrrreere 94 Communicating Across Routers 96 Changing Workgroup Names cceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 97 Changing Destination Names cccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 98 Windows Host Configuration eeeeeeeeee eeen 100 Windows NT 4 0 Host Setup ccccccseeeecseeeeseeeseeees 100 Windows XP 2000 Host Setup ccecceeseeeeeseteeeeeees 104 Windows NT 3 51 Host Setup ccccccceeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 114 Windows Me or 9x Host Setup ceecceeseeeeeeseeeteeeees 116 Printronix Printing System PPS Host Setup 117 Windows 3 1 Host Setup cccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeees 118 Windows Troubleshooting Tips seeen 119 Technical Support ecccecceeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseaees 119 NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network 120 HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display 120 Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer 121 Cannot Browse The NIC On The Network 121 Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output 20 122 TCP IP Access Problem cccccceesceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeteneees 122 Web Browser HTTP Problem 124 Windows NT 4 0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems 125 Table of Contents 5 Unix Configuration cccceecceeeeeeeeeees 127 OVENI W rhai a a aae en ARa ts rund nad T aR teenies 127 Unix Environment Description seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereereee 127 Unix NIC Configuration esseseeeseesseesirser
252. rinter number within this PSERVER NLM store tcpip lt ifnum gt addr lt address gt Example store tcpip 1 addr 192 75 11 9 Store the IP address for the NIC store tcpip lt ifnum gt mask lt mask gt Example store tcpip 1 mask 255 255 255 0 Store the subnet mask for the NIC store tcpip lt ifnum gt opts rarp bootp dhcp persistdhcp dns Example store tcpip 1 opts rarp bootp dhcp Enable or disable the automatic RARP BOOTP DHCP DNS or persistent DHCP requests for IP addresses upon bootup If you are storing the NIC TCP IP network settings within the device you will not need to rely on RARP BOOTP DHCP or DNS for new settings store tcpip ifnum frametype ethernet2 802 2snap Example store tcpip 1 frametype ethernet2 802 2snap Control which frame type s is supported with the TCP IP protocol By default both Ethernet 2 and 802 2snap are enabled but normal TCP IP communications rely on Ethernet 2 This setting has no affect on other supported network protocols e g Novell store tcpip route add default 1 2 lt router gt lt ifnum gt lt metric gt Example store tcpip route add defaultl 192 75 11 1 1 Store a default router gateway defined by router IP Address lt router gt lt ifnum gt so the NIC knows where to direct packets destined for another subnet It is easier to store one default entry rather than an entry per remote host or network as in the previous command
253. rp keepalivedata Example store tcpip tcp opts keepalive disbufmgmt Control whether the NIC maintains a connection with a host when data cannot be accepted into its buffer Normally the keepalive feature is enabled so when the printer cannot accept data the print job connection is maintained and continued once the situation clears The keepalivedata option controls whether the keepalive packet contains a data byte for hosts that require it If disbufmgmt is disabled i e the NIC will not buffer any data when there is a blocked situation with the printer Normally it is best to have both keepalive and disbufmgmt enabled If zerolPArp is disabled then a NIC with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 will not allow IP access until the IP address is configured If zerolPArp is enabled on a NIC with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 then any attempted access with a valid IP address is assumed for this NIC and an Arp lookup is performed Default enabled store tcpip tcp access root add del lt network gt lt netmask gt Example store tcpip tcp access add 192 75 11 25 Add or remove an entry from the NIC TCP access list defined by lt network gt If the list has an entry only this host can print to and remotely interact with the print server store tcpip from default current Example store tcpip from default Set all TCP IP network settings back to factory defaults Example store tcpip from current Store all current TCP IP network set
254. rrent status of the network The statistical data provided is broken down by network protocol You can use this form to troubleshoot network related problems 92 4 Windows Configuration Overview This chapter details a complete Windows configuration setup including e Identifying the NIC on the network using TCP IP as the underlying protocol e Configuring the NIC with its mandatory TCP IP settings IP address and subnet mask e Configuring a new printer on the Windows station Windows Environment Description The NIC supports network printing under Windows environments by using TCP IP In a Windows NT setup pure TCP IP is used as the network protocol whereas with Windows 95 98 or Windows Me NetBIOS is used over TCP IP The ideal configuration is a network printer defined on the NT 2000 server to be shared by Windows 95 98 Me clients However any Windows station can also go directly to the NIC 93 Chapter 4 Windows NIC Configuration Windows NIC Configuration 94 The IP address and subnet mask are mandatory TCP IP settings and are needed before the print server can be detected on the network There are also additional optional settings This section offers alternative methods for configuring your NIC in a Windows environment and describes some of the more common optional settings available Mandatory Since TCP IP is used for Windows printing the NIC must be configured with a minimum of an IP
255. rver 11 Select Define additional properties and click Create 12 Click Assignments in the dialogue that pops up and click Add 13 Select the queue you defined earlier or browse for a different one 14 Click OK to assign the queue to the printer 15 Click OK to close the Printers Details dialog and make the changes permanent 16 Click on a branch in the tree i e context that you would like to create the NIC print server object in NOTE If the context you choose is different than the one the file server object for the file server you are using is in you must set the context on the NIC See Setting The NIC NDS Context NDS Setups on page 182 17 Click the right mouse button to bring up a submenu and choose Create from this menu The New Object dialog displays 18 In the Class of new object list select Print Server and click OK Bindery PSERVER Setup Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x 19 Type the name for the print server in the Print Server name field By default the name is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server s Ethernet address e g M_091C1A NOTE The name you use here must match the name stored on the NIC This name can be found by using the list pserver command See List Commands on page 335 for more information 20 Select Define additional properties and click Create 21 Click Assignments in the dialog that opens and
256. rver and all related LUs should be active Using the printer s web pages go to the configuration screen Configuration Screens 1 To configure the line matrix printer fill out and submit the forms using the following links Table 12 Configuration Forms Configuration HTML Forms Network TCP IP including Windows and Novell network settings Print Path Destination Model Log Path and I O port configuration Print Model Shortcut to the print path model configuration forms Log Path Shortcut to the print path log path configurations form TN5250 3270 TN5250 3270 configuration settings SNMP SNMP configuration settings Administration Names and passwords System System operation modes reboot factory defaults 2 Select the TN5250 3270 section from the configuration screen NOTE Changes will only take effect after you reset the line matrix printer from the System page 289 Chapter 12 Configuration Screens 290 The following displays Mode TN5250 Click here for TN3270 mode Host ok eg 204 191 175 114 or host domain com Port Device Description Message Queue Name Message Queue Library Device Type GENERIC PRINTER WSCST Name WSCST Library Auto Connect Start Auto Connect Click here 3 Select TN3270E Mode The following displays Configuration for Print Path d2prn Mode TN3270 Click here for TN5250 mode Host ok eg 204 191 175 114 or host domain com Port 23
257. s are available e select the desired I O port on the Status HTML form i e http NICIPaddress indexStatus html e g http 192 75 11 9 indexStatus htm1 that comes with the NIC e enter the lpstat command directly on the print server once logged in as guest or root In each case you are given a description of each I O port status and a list of queued jobs Table 13 describes some of the common terms you may encounter Table 13 Key Printer Logging Terms Term Description idle There is no job queued for the NIC I O port blocked The printer is not allowing the NIC to send data to it Check that there is not a printer error and it is online and ready to go waiting The NIC knows about a print job but is waiting for the host to send more data or to send an expected packet 349 Chapter 16 Printer Monitoring And Logging 350 Printer Logging Through Logpaths In the NIC product manual destinations are described as logical queues with associated models and logpaths Models determine if any extra processing is needed with the print jobs passing through and logpaths determine whether any logging is needed for each job Each logpath on the NIC consists of two parts TYPE The type of log information to be captured The choices are job for job ID and username user for user ID and three messages per job cksum for file checksums printer for special printer feedback and ioport for para
258. s printer monitoring 303 Trailer String Print Model 69 Print Path 67 Transmit Power 802 11b 60 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T RPRINTER NPRINTER 197 10 100Base T 194 10 100Base T printing 199 AS 400 273 AS 400 ASCII 241 cannot browse NIC on Network 121 defining LPR printer 121 HTML configuration forms 120 HTTP 124 373 Index NetWare 3 x no PSERVER connection 169 NetWare 4 x no PSERVER connection 170 NetWare 5 x no PSERVER connection 170 NIC cannot be found 120 NIC cannot be found on Network 149 no extra page 152 no form feed 152 Novell 168 printer errors 122 printing 150 PSERVER setup 10 100Base T 194 stair stepped output 151 TCP IP access problem 122 Unix 149 Web browser 124 Windows 119 Windows 2000 Host setup 125 Windows NT 4 0 Host setup 125 U Unix 374 crossing routers 132 environment 127 Host configuration 133 manual system V Host setup 133 NIC configuration 128 TCP IP access problem 152 troubleshooting 149 using ARP 128 using BOOTP 131 using RARP 130 Unix troubleshooting Dynamically Set Params Read Only message 154 URL home page 51 User 802 11b 61 Users NIC 343 Using ARP Windows 94 V V Host setup manual system 133 Verification NIC 39 VTAM Definitions TN3270E 277 W Web browser problem 244 troubleshooting 124 Web server overview 55 Windows communication routers 96 configuration 93 environment de
259. s the length of the message exceeds the Short E mail Message Length in which case the message will be truncated If disabled the message will contain additional information including the device description device name and location alert description alert group alert severity level and printer status Default Disabled e Short E mail Message Length Specifies the maximum size of the short e mail message Acceptable values are 15 to 80 characters Default 80 characters e Send Test Message Provides a way to test the validity of the e mail address SMTP server address If checked a test message will be sent to the specified e mail address when the submit button is pressed Default All alert groups are disabled by default If the alert message is to be sent to a cellular phone or pager the Short E mail Format option should be enabled Once this option is enabled you may specify the maximum e mail message length 15 80 characters When enabled the message will contain the alert description the severity level device description and device name unless the length of the message exceeds the Short E mail Message Length in which case the message will be truncated 79 Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration 80 If the Short E mail format is disabled the message will contain additional information including the device name and location alert description alert group alert severity level and printer status To test the val
260. sage option 000 INFO INQ Blank page ccce YES YES NO Page size control gt YES NO YES Resident fonts ccececcceee YES YES NO Resource retention 008 YES YES NO 262 Configuring AFP with CRTPSFCFG on V4R3 and Above Optional Edge orient Use outline fonts PSF defined option Font substitution messages Capture host fonts at printer Font resolution for formatting Font mapping table IDFA cess a Cut sheet emulation mode Use DBCS simulation fonts Replace scenari acrari ai Authority aeieeiaii NO NO NONE for more values YES NO SEARCH NONE NONE NO YES LIBCRTAUT YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES SEARCH 240 300 Name NONE Name NONE CHKFIRST CHKALL YES NO YES NO Name LIBCRTAUT CHANGE Figure 35 Example CRTPSFCFG Command V4R2 and above 3 The following parameters are recommended PSF configuration PSFCFG The name used for this PSF configuration object The name must match the user defined object name USRDFNOBv in the printer DEVD PSF configuration PSFCFG The name used for this PSF configuration object The name must match the user defined object name USRDFNOBv in the printer DEVD IPDS pass through IPDSPASTHR To print SCS files specify YES PSF transforms SCS into IPDS before printing 263
261. scription 93 mandatory configuration 94 NIC configuration 94 optional configuration 94 troubleshooting 119 using ARP 94 Windows 2000 Host setup 104 Host setup troubleshooting 125 Index Windows 3 1 Host setup 118 Windows 9x Host setup 116 Windows Me Host setup 116 Windows Network NetBIOS TCP IP 61 Workgroup Name 62 Windows NT 3 51 Host setup 114 Windows NT 4 0 Host setup 100 Host setup troubleshooting 125 Windows XP Host setup 104 Wireless Kerberos 49 Wireless Network Indicator 26 Wireless NIC Configuration 40 Wireless Parameter Configuration 41 Workgroup Name Windows Network NetBIOS TCP IP 62 WSCST Library TN5250 3270 76 WSCST Name TN5250 3270 76 Z z OS communications control unit 214 connectivity problems 226 define printer to PSF 219 printer sharing 224 printing IPDS 213 TCP IP profile 214 verifying TCP IP attached printer 223 z OS Configuration TN3270E 275 375 Index 376 For technical assistance contact your Distributor VAR Reseller for service For further assistance contact the Printronix Customer Support Center Printronix Customer Support Center Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 410 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 Web site http www printronix com public servicessupport default aspx Printronix Supplier Center Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 1 46 25 1900 Asia Pacific 65 654
262. se T Interfaces on page 171 Using HTML Forms When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server a new print server must be defined to represent the NIC This name must match the predefined name given to the print server The default is M_xxxxxx or M302_xxxxx for the Wireless Adapter where xxxxxx represents the last six digits of the Ethernet address found on the configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet Parameters MAC address e g M_091C1A or M302_00008 To use the HTML forms to define a print queue do the following 1 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP The command to change the print server name is Syntax store pserver name newname Example to change the name to micro1 store pserver name microl 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress adminConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 adminConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 157 Chapter 6 Novell Host Configuration 3 At the Administration Configuration HTML form that displays highlight the field beside the Name heading and type in the new name of the print server 4 Click Submit when done and physically repower the printer to make the new setting take effect Novell Host Configuration ADAPTER 158
263. se sensitive so they will not be recognized if they are typed incorrectly By default they are all in lowercase If you are setting up in a Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x environment the destination must be renamed to uppercase to match the PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator entry Please see set dest lt dest gt name lt new_ name gt on page 322 for information on changing names e Does the destination you used in your PSERVER setup have the Novell service enabled Please see Commands on page 305 for information on enabling disabling services NOTE The debug information that follows can be found by trying to telnet the NIC and issuing the commands given or launching a browser to the Novell status page on the NIC e g http 192 168 11 9 networkNovellStatus html e Try doing a debug nest ipx telnet command on the NIC or find the IPX Layer section on the Novell HTML status page Check that a board has been bound to the NIC and that the network number is correct for your network If not you may want to set a specific frame type for the NIC to use You can find out what frame type is bound to which board number using the debug nest odi command or from the ODI Layer section on the Novell HTML status page e Tryadebug nest fserver telnet command or find the File Servers section on the Novell HTML status page If no file servers show up then there is probably a problem with the network connection or th
264. serial interface may be used if the NIC adapter was previously installed Loading the printer firmware via the printer s parallel port will not update the NIC firmware Turning off the printer before the firmware update is complete may permanently damage the NIC adapter Updating the printer firmware takes time Please be patient and wait for the E NET READY message to display on the LCD Do not turn off the printer before it has completed the firmware download procedure The LCD will display ONLINE E NET READY when the download is complete Wait for this message before turning off the printer 6 From the front panel navigate to the IP Address and Netmask Subnet Mask menu options and enter the appropriate values Do not enter the Gateway Address at this point You must press ENTER after inputting each segment of the IP Address and Netmask 37 Chapter 2 Configuration Tools 38 Put the printer online and wait for the E NET READY message to display on the front panel Placing the printer online starts the NIC IP Address and Netmask update process This process will take several minutes NOTE If you do not put the printer online the setting you just entered will not take effect Do not turn the printer off until you see the E NET READY message If you turn the printer off before the new values are written to memory in the NIC adapter you will need to repower the printer and repeat steps 6 and 7 above
265. sers If jobtimeout is set to some value other than 0 the NIC will only wait this amount of seconds when getting printer feedback This is only used if you have a logpath port and type set on a particular destination store pserver tcpsocket lt tcp port gt port lt new tcp port gt Example store pserver tcpsocket 4000 port 5000 Change a pre defined TCP port number lt tcp port gt on the NIC to a new TCP port number lt new tcp port gt The default number is 9100 for prn store pserver tcpsocket lt tcp port gt dest lt dest gt Example store pserver tcpsocket 5000 dest dlprn Assign a pre defined TCP port number lt tcp port gt to a particular destination lt dest gt on the NIC Therefore if you are using a print method that sends jobs directly to a TCP port number you still have the option to process the job data through this destination setting ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER Store Commands store pserver tcpsocket add lt tcp port gt dest lt dest gt Example store pserver tcpsocket add 9101 dest d2prn Maps the port number to a destination store pserver tcpsocket del lt tcp port gt dest lt dest gt Example store pserver tcpsocket del 9101 dest d2prn Deletes a mapped port number destination already defined by listed commands store pserver novell passwd lt password gt Example
266. set sysinfo email lt email gt Example set sysinfo email JohnDoe Printronix com Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging information from a particular logpath on the NIC Email name is the host or IP name of the user Default Unconfigured set sysinfo email emailname domain Example set sysinfo email joe printronix com Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging information from a particular logpath on the NIC IMPORTANT Set Commands set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress Example set sysinfo syslog 192 75 11 30 Set the IP address of the host running the SYSLOG daemon NIC debugging or print job and printer logging information can be sent to that IP address set sysinfo dns lt IPaddress gt Example set sysinfo dns 192 75 11 2 Set your DNS server IP address so the NIC can resolve host names when used with its built in Telnet and ping clients set sysinfo domain lt name gt Example set sysinfo domain printronix com Sets the domain name for the NIC which when combined with the print server name forms the fully qualified domain name of the NIC set sysinfo descramblekey lt hexval gt Example set sysinfo descramblekey 1234 Set the key value used for descrambling print jobs that have passed through Printronix npscramble utility on a TCP IP host This key is a four digit hexadecimal value obtained from the host software nposcramble Within the npscramble source code there is a
267. settings while this message displays When the initialization is complete the message E NET READY displays and you can safely change the NIC settings from the control panel 1 You can set any of three listed parameters from the printer control panel These parameters are located in the Ethernet Address Adapter Address or Wireless Address menu 2 Power on the printer The message E NET INIT appears when the printer is powered on Configuration can be done after the E NET READY message appears 3 Disable the Power Saver mode before starting this procedure Configuration Using The Control Panel 4 Always print an E NET test page before performing any updates or network configuration using the following steps e For P7000 printers a 929 5 f a 929 5 Take the printer offline When the printer LCD reads OFFLINE QUICK SETUP press the up and down arrow keys simultaneously to unlock the control panel Press the left arrow until Diagnostics appears Press the down arrow until Printer Tests appears Press the down arrow until Shift Recycle appears Press the left arrow until the following appears for each type of NIC e Adapter Test External NIC e Ethernet Test Integrated NIC Press Enter For P5000 printers Take the printer offline When the printer LCD reads OFFLINE CONFIG CONTROL press the up and down arrow keys simultaneously to unlock th
268. ss of the Ethernet Configuration Procedure Configuring PSF to print IPDS files includes the following steps 1 Define the z OS communications control unit to z OS See Define the Communications Control Unit to z OS on page 214 2 Modify the TCP IP profile on your z OS system if necessary See Modify the TCP IP Profile in z OS on page 214 3 Ping the printer See Verify the Printer Connection on page 217 4 Define the printer as a writer controlled printer to JES See Define the Printer to JES on page 218 5 Define the printer to PSF with a PRINTDEV statement including the IP address See Define the Printer to PSF on page 219 This section does not provide all the information you need to install and configure TCP IP on your z OS system For more information on installing TCP IP refer to TCP IP for z OS Customization and Administration Guide The routing of information is determined on the basis of the IP address and is performed by IP gateways After the network is configured correctly the z OS host appears to be communicating directly with the TCP IP attached printer 213 Chapter 9 214 Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files Define the Communications Control Unit to z OS If you have not already done so define the communications control unit for the z OS host such as the 3172 or the 3745 control unit to z OS Use either an z OS configuration program MVSCP
269. sseessseesee Advanced function printing Port number cseeeeeesteeeseeeeeneeeees Online at IPL eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees Font Identifier cccsseseseeeeseeeesees PONS ZOsn annas Form tood icin iaia Separator drawer eeceeeeeeeeeee Separator program cceeeeeeeee Libary eran nae Se o Printer error Message n Message Queue ceee LIDPary arona ie SA Activation timer n Image configuration eeeeeee Maximum pending requests Print while converting Print request timer ee eeeeeeeee Form definition eeeeseeeeeeeeeees Remote location Name or address 0ecsee User defined options eee for more values User defined object Library eeraa iarsira nies User defined driver program Library hacked eas Secure Connection cceeeeeeeee Validation list ccseeeeeeeeees Library ei ta gt P7000 gt LAN gt IPDS gt 0 gt IP YES gt 5001 YES gt 011 NONE CONT FILE NONE INQ CTLD 170 NONE 6 YES NOMAX F1010110 LIBL NONE NONE NONE NONE NO NONE Name LCL RMT VRT SNPT LAN 3287 3812 4019 4201 0 1 2 3 4 10 13 301 LEXLINK IP USRDFN NO YES 0 65535 YES NO 3 5 11 12 13 18 19 000 1 999 9 NONE TYPE CONT CONT2 CUT 1 255 FILE Name NONE Name LIBL CURLIB INQ INFO Name
270. st and disabled by preceding it with a character in the list Supported option is intnl for international mode and openauth for open authentication Set the default key for WLAN encryption store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan defkey disable lt 1 4 gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN device lt 1 4 gt is the number identifying one of the four keys 1 4 A value of zero or the word disable disables encryption Set the key to a given value store ifc lt ifnum gt wlan key lt key num gt lt key value gt lt S lt string key gt lt length gt gt lt ifnum gt is the interface number for the WLAN interface lt key num gt is the number identifying one of the four keys 1 4 lt key value gt is the encryption key value for lt key num gt The value must consist of 5 or 13 double or quad digit HEX numbers separated by colon or dash characters for readability e g D1C2 B3A4 9586 7768 594A 3B2C 1D Alpha characters are NOT case sensitive All zero disables encryption for lt key num gt If is the first character the remainder of the argument is treated as a literal string with all alpha numeric characters allowed except spaces Key length is inferred from the length of key value so leading zeroes of longer keys must be entered not blanked WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN WLAN ADAPTER WLAN Store Commands Enables or disables Kerberos store kerberos opts auth
271. start By using the manual method time is allowed to properly prepare the AS 400 after the printer is powered up but before a connection is established This method should only be used during an initial installation until the printer and the AS 400 are synchronized The normal method is to have autoconnect enabled The autoconnect feature has a cycle time of approximately one minute A little patience may be required when first turning on the printer before the connection becomes visible on the AS400 TN5250 Job Formatting Forms width forms length CPI and LPI are controlled by the TN5250 data stream unless the front panel TN5250 Host Override option is enabled The CPI is controlled through TN5250 via the font selection in the Change Device Description CHGDEVPRT command A completed screen looks like the example shown in Figure 41 Change Device Desc Printer CHGDEVPRT Type choices then press Enter Device description Online at IPL Font Identifier Point Size Form Feed Separator drawer DEVD ONLINE NO FONT 011 NONE FORMFEED CONT SEPDRAWER FILE 297 Chapter 13 TN5250 Job Formatting Separator program SEPPGM NONE Library Printer error message PRTERMSG INFO Library LIBL Host print transform TRANSFORM NO Manufacturer type and model MFRTYPMDL SAME Paper source 1 PPRSRC1 MFRTYPMDL Paper source 2 PPRSRC2 MFRTYPMDL Envelope source ENVELOPE MFRTYPMDL ASCII code page 899 supp
272. sult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Printers Printronix P5000 LJ Series P5000 Compatible Have Disk Cored 16 Click the necessary printer under Printers Add Printer Wizard Name Your Printer You must assign a name for this printer Supply a name for this printer Some programs do not support server and printer name combinations of more than 31 characters Printer name lt Back Cancel NOTE By default the printer you selected appears as the printer name 17 Click Next 110 Windows XP 2000 Host Setup Add Printer Wizard Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other network users 18 Click Share as then Next Add Printer Wizard Location and Comment You have the option of supplying a location and description of this printer 2000 LPM capability 19 Enter information in the Location and Comment fields as necessary then click Next 20 Click Next to print a test page 111 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer wizard You specified the following printer settings Name Printronix P5000 Shared as Printron Port KRN HHN KNN HRN Model Printronix P5000 Default Yes Test page Yes Location Warehouse Comment 2000 LPM capability To close this w
273. t Telenet to the adapter Login as root and press Enter for the password Flip dip switch 2 up Type the following at the telnet prompt set user passwd root save reset Wait about 1 minute for the adapter to reboot after the reset command Turn the printer off wait 15 seconds and turn the printer back on Wait 1 minute for the adapter to boot Telnet back into the adapter logging in as root with no password and pressing Enter TCP Access Lists Procedure C 1 Turn the printer on 2 Take the printer offline and unlock the front panel by pressing the up and down arrows keys at the same time then releasing 3 Press all four arrow keys up down prev next at the same time and release 4 Press the right next arrow until PRINTER MGMT appears Press the down arrow and then the right next arrow until E NET To DEFAULT appears 6 Press Enter 7 Re program the IP address information from the front panel NOTE Steps 1 5 also clears the IP address information and sets the adapter back to the factory default TCP Access Lists Within TCP IP environments the NIC can restrict host access to destinations queues and remote command e g rsh remd remsh and telnet execution services This is done using an access list similar in function to the Unix rhosts file NOTE Access list settings are not configurable through the HTML forms provided with the NIC To view the current access list
274. t please refer to NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network shown above Is the NIC able to communicate with the attached printer To test this you can 1 Telnet to the print server e g telnet 192 75 11 9 and login as root 2 Enter the command start fox prn 3 Execute stop prn right after starting the test 4 This test will send the same text line over and over to the attached printer Is the job getting stuck in the Unix host queue If so check that the printer is online If it is there is a configuration error on the Unix station so creating a new print setup may be needed Is the control panel showing any activity to indicate it is receiving data If so but there is nothing printing check if a manual form feed is needed Also ensure that the printer can support the type of job coming through Do all jobs fail or just certain ones For example is it possible that jobs from a certain application are the only ones to fail If so check the type of data it sends to make sure it matches the printer emulation Check the application printer configuration for mistakes If you are using System V was the spooler restarted Stair Stepped Output Stair Stepped Output Stair stepped output is print which starts at the top left of the page but every line thereafter starts a little further over to the right It also refers to Unix jobs that print one line of text at the top of a page followed by a series of blank pages T
275. t var LANDSCAPE 0xlb 0x26 Ox6c 0x31 0x4f Define a new variable to be used in header trailer or switch strings on the NIC and call it lt variable string gt lt variable string gt can be a space separated list of words hexadecimal numbers e g 0x04 or references to other pre defined variables It is easiest to make up the lt variable string gt with hexadecimal values as shown in the example NOTE One variable counts as one element within header and trailer strings Defined variables are referenced in strings by placing a before the variable name e g set model m1 trailer SFF set var from default Set all variable settings back to factory defaults set var from stored Set all current variable settings to the values stored in flash memory 334 WLAN ADAPTER WLAN List Commands List Commands These commands list the current or working settings for a particular section within the command shell To view stored settings in flash memory insert stored after list For example list prn shows the current printer settings but list stored prn shows the settings in flash memory Normally these should match To view default settings in flash memory insert default after list list all Lists all current settings list arp List the current ARP table that the NIC adheres to in a TCP IP network list dest destination List the current destination settings e g names and mapped I O ports models and logpaths
276. tached to SCO Setup Type in the host name as configured in teh etc hosts file Press Enter or Return The following prompt displays Remote printing configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote printing requests Please enter the printer name q to quit diprn Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer r l r Please enter the name of the remote host that d1prn is attached to salesdept Printer diprn is connected to host salesdept Is this correct y n 139 Chapter 5 SCO Setup 140 Type y and press Enter or Return The following prompt displays Remote printing configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote printing requests Please enter the printer name q to quit d1prn Is d1prn a remote printer or a local printer r l r Please enter the name of the remote host that diprn is attached to salesdept Printer d1prn is connected to host salesdept Is this correct y n y If salesdept currently runs SCO OpenServer Release 5 or above it can support the extended remote printer protocol Do you want to turn on the extended RLP protocol support flag If you re not sure answer n y n n SCO Setup Type n and press Enter or Return The following prompt displays Remote printing configuration Enter information for remote printers or local printers accepting remote
277. tains Some printers use NICs with dip switches and LEDs Other printers use NICs that plug into the Peripheral Component Interface PCI controller boards that have no dip switches or LEDs NOTE If both cards are present you will see two sets of front panel options under network parameter E Net Adapter and Ethernet The two NICs are two separate interfaces and are networked You can autoswitch between the two If your NIC does not have dip switches or LEDs refer to Speed Setting for 10 100Base T on page 29 23 Chapter 1 Interfaces 10 100Base T ADAPTER The NIC at the rear of the printer for the 10 100Base T interface has two indicator lights and two DIP switches as shown in Figure 2 NOTE The Wireless NIC DIP switch functionality is the same as the 10 100Base T NIC STAT System Status NET Data to Network Figure 2 Status Indicator Lights and DIP Switches 24 10 100Base T Run and Auto Reset Modes Run mode is the normal operating state of the NIC Auto Reset mode is entered when the watchdog timer is triggered and the Print Server resets itself In either mode the STAT LED flashes at a varying rate depending on whether the unit IP address is configured The Run Mode and Auto Reset Mode indicator descriptions are given in Table 1 Table 1 Run Mode and Auto Reset Mode Indicator Descriptions STAT Indication Description OFF flashes on once per second Normal Mode I
278. tely to a printer with the NIC 115 Chapter 4 Windows Host Configuration 116 Windows Me or 9x Host Setup To configure a new printer on a Windows 9x station 1 13 Select Start Settings Printers Double click the Add Printer icon Select Network Printer from the second window of the Add Printer wizard that loaded At the next window click Browse to help fill in the network path of this printer The Browse for Printer dialog box displays Double click on the appropriate workgroup containing the NIC By default the print server falls under Workgroup Continue searching the network until you see the NIC name P_XXXXxx or M_Xxxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server Ethernet address found when a configuration is printed Once you see the NIC double click on it to display a list of predefined destinations queues from which to choose Select a destination queue that will use dlprn Click OK once you have selected a destination Back at the network path window select Next since this path should now be filled in for you At the next window select the appropriate print driver and click Next Fill in a name for this new network printer at the next window and decide if you want this to be the default printer This printer name can be anything you would like as long as it is unique When prompted for a test page select either Yes or No depending on
279. ter 15 Complete Command List lpstat ioport jobID Example lpstat prn Display active and queued jobs and I O port status for a given ioport or jobID Specifying one of these parameters will shorten the output and focus on the particular I O port or print job specified cancel jobID Example cancel diprn 10 Remove a job from an I O port queue Use lpstat to finda particular job ID first start fox tts loopb prn Example start fox prn Begin a debugging test on one of the I O ports on the NIC The tests available are fox A continuous stream of text sent to the attached printer This is a good test for troubleshooting hardware as long as the attached printer supports text output tts A continuous stream of Gandalf 400C TTS compatible text sent to the attached printer loopb Loopback test Any input characters from the device attached to the I O port is echoed back stop all prn Stop an output test on an I O port disable ioport destination Example disable prn Disable an I O port so that queued jobs are not printed or disable a destination so jobs cannot be queued to it 340 Miscellaneous Commands enable ioport destination printer mgr Example enable prn Enable an I O port so that queued jobs are printed or enable a destination so jobs can be queued to it Example enable printermgr Enables the printer debug port to allow remote printer management software to function close tcp TCPindexnumber Example clos
280. termine how to verify this Also verify that you are spelling the printer name correctly and verify that LPRPORTD is running 207 Chapter 8 OS 2 Workstation Configuration ADAPTER 208 WLAN ADAPTER TCP IP Access Problem If you can ping the printer from a workstation but you cannot Web browse Telnet or print to the printer through the NIC there may be an incorrect entry in the TCP access list So the workstation can use the NIC one of two things must happen e the TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this workstation or e all entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations hosts access to the above TCP services To view the current access list use the printer control panel to access the configuration menu see the User s Manual for configuration menu information From the DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests menu choose the E NET Test Page When the page prints look under the TCP ACCESS TABLE section for the TCP access list entries To add delete a TCP access list entry refer to TCP Access Lists on page 347 NOTE When the following procedure is used the TCP access list will be cleared but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is complete To reset all Adapter or WLAN Adapter NIC TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible 1 Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel See the User s Manual for
281. ters and queues to it If you have not already done this do it now The setup is similar to creating a PSERVER setup for the NIC except that there are no restrictions about which names may be used for the print server and printer objects NOTE Write down the printer number s assigned to the printer s you are going to be using for this setup You will need them in a later step HTML Method 1 Load aPSERVER on your Netware 3 x Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x file server i e issue a load pserver pservername command on the file server NOTE If itis an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4 x 5 x file server you must specify the PSERVER name and context for pservername For example load pserver sales_ps sales microplex 2 Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the print server over TCP IP 3 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 4 Look under the Novell section and find a row in the RPRINTER category 5 Click Enabled and enter the name used with the PSERVER NLM into the Print Server Name field NOTE If it is an NDS pserver enter only the PSERVER name and not the context e g sales ps 6 Enter the printer number of the printer you would like serviced into the Printer Number
282. th a status of RDY are printed before releasing the session which does not terminate the writer however Release timer RLSTMR Specifies the amount of time to wait before a session or dialog is released without terminating the writer The ACTRLSTMR parameter specifies when this timer is to be activated Set the parameter to a value at least equal to the TIMEOUT value on the printer The recommended value is SEC15 Remote Location name or address RMTLOCNAME Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer TCP IP port PORT Specify 5001 TCP IP activation time ACTTMR This value specifies the number of seconds that PSF 400 waits for a printer to respond to an activation request If only one system is using the printer use the default value 170 seconds If more than one system is using the printer specify NOMAX which causes PSF 400 to wait indefinitely for a response to an activation request 255 Chapter 11 Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer 256 Configuring PSF 400 For IPDS On V3R7 And Above To configure IPDS on AS 400 V3R7 and above use the following commands e CRTPSFCFG Optional e CRTDEVPRT Configuring AFP With CRTPSFCFG On V3R7 Or V4R1 Optional New for V3R7 is the ability to specify three TCP IP related parameters for PSF in a printer device description RMTLOCNAME PORT and ACTTMR In V3R2 CRTPSFCFG which replaced WRKAFP2 was used to specify these same parameters along with ot
283. th the NIC S2 jumper position stating all factory default settings are to be used while the NIC is up and running Unrecoverable errors detected by the NIC firmware force the Print Server into Firmware Panic mode Manually reset the NIC to resume operation Stores firmware code and configurable settings Allows for upgrades without replacing hardware inside the NIC File Transfer Protocol Used for transferring files from one TCP IP host to another and used in the upgrade process Hardware device that translates data between two incompatible networks The IP address of a gateway Bus errors address errors and illegal instructions force the NIC into this NIC non operational mode HyperText Markup Language Format used for documents viewable on the World Wide Web Interface Number Represents the network interface With a NIC this will always be 1 for Ethernet Unix host filter file that processes the print job before it is sent over the network to the NIC Port for attaching peripherals to The NIC provides four PRN1 PRN2 COM1 COM2 IP Address LAN LED logpath LPD LPR MAC MIB model NetBIOS Monitor Mode npsh PDF The Internet Protocol Address A numeric address such as 123 45 61 23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode The printer has an LED display which shows the status of the printer to the operator Deter
284. th the print server over TCP IP 2 Direct your Web browser to URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf htm1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 3 Look under the Novell section and go to the Frame Type field to select the appropriate frametype 4 Click SUBMIT when done and physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Manual Telnet Method 1 Telnet to the print server This will bring up a login screen telnet ipaddress NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 You should see a prompt with the NIC IP address ipaddress root gt 3 At the prompt enter store pserver novell frametype ethernet2 802 3 802 2 802 2snap autosense 4 Reset the unit to make the changes take effect reset Changing The NIC Mode NDS And Bindery Setups Changing The NIC Mode NDS And Bindery Setups The NIC allows you to store a particular mode for the unit to operate in This will be either NDS Bindery or autosense If you use autosense the NIC will first attempt to log in to an NDS file server and if it fails will try to log in to a Bindery file server NOTE If you are using both NDS and Bindery file servers in your setup set the m
285. the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance Windows NT 4 0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems Windows NT 4 0 Or 2000 Host Setup Problems The installation procedure covered earlier in this chapter assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address subnet mask and gateway if required and that the administrator can ping and telnet to the NIC adapter from the server console If this is not the case use the printer front panel to configure the NIC adapter before proceeding Installing Microsoft TCP IP Printing The NIC installation for Windows NT 4 0 2000 also requires the Microsoft TCP IP Printing service on the server To install this service click the Network icon in the Control Panel and click the Services tab Click Add Service and select Microsoft TCP IP printing e Do you have administrative privileges This installation requires administrator privileges e LPR port is not listed in step 6 on page 101 Cancel the installation and install the Microsoft TCP IP printing service on the server e LPR configuration warning during step 7 on page 101 LPR Port Configuration Warning x The LPD Server did not respond as expected to a test command Any of the following can cause this error The entry for IP Address or Queue name is incorrect The TCP IP print device LPD server does not support the test command The specified TCP IP print device is not available If the
286. the path a print job takes when it reaches the network adapter First the job goes to a destination queue e g d1prn where it then passes through an associated model e g m1 for extra processing and logpath e g 11 for job and printer logging Finally the job reaches the NIC s I O port e g PRN where it passes through to the attached printer The Print Path form displays one destination s settings at a time From here you can then select another destination or you can go directly to an I O port to configure port settings Destination Settings Print Path Destination Settings dlprn Name d1prn BackChannel pm none tk M socket M Ipd M Ipsched M rprinter Services M pserver M netbios M ftpd M 5250 3270 SERENA Mouel ml m2 m3 m4 Cm5 C m Cm m8 Figure 7 Print Path Configuration Destination Settings ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER Name Destination Settings Name of the destination The default destination queue names are diprn d2prn d3prn d4prn d5prn d6prn d7prn and d8prn Back Channel I O port to receive printer feedback when a print job passes through this destination By default all of the print queues start with no backchannel Services Define what type s of print services the destination will support By default all services enabled Parameter socket Printing to a TCP port number e g 9100 on the NIC Ipd Re
287. the printer name location description etc It also allows you to change the root and guest user passwords e System this menu item allows you to reboot the NIC or restore its settings to the factory default Network Configuration TCP IP Interface 1 10 100Mbps Ethernet Interface 2 Wireless PCMCIA Routing The network configuration allows you to specify the setting for each network protocol Beside each protocol name is a checkbox which allows you to enable or disable each protocol depending on your network printing needs NOTE TCP IP is the only supported protocol which is always enabled TCP IP Network PERSIST IP Address Subnet Mask RARP BOOTP DHCP DNS DHCP Stored 10 223 2 95 255 255 0 0 v v Active 10 223 2 95 255 255 0 0 PERSIST IP Address Subnet Mask RARP BOOTP DHCP DNS DHCP Stored 10 224 2 96 255 255 0 0 v v Active 10 224 2 96 255 255 0 0 Destination Mask Gateway Interface 1 2 102 1 02 01 O2 102 default1 Stored 10 223 1 254 Active 10 223 1 254 default2 Stored 10 224 1 254 Active 10 224 1 254 Figure 5 TCP IP Network Configuration 57 58 Chapter 3 Network Configuration Interface The two edit fields contain the NIC s IP address and subnet mask The check boxes enable the RARP BOOTP DHCP DNS and Persistent DHCP protocols which are alternate methods of assigning IP addresses On most networks you want to enter a p
288. then click Add 22 Select the printer you created earlier 23 Click OK to assign this printer to this print server 24 Click OK to close the Printer Servers Details dialog and make the changes permanent 25 Physically repower the printer to make the new settings take effect Bindery PSERVER Setup Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x A Bindery PSERVER setup is possible under both Netware 3 x Netware 4 x and Netware 5 x If you are using Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x Bindery emulation is required Please consult your Novell manual on how to set up Bindery emulation A Bindery set up using PCONSOLE in Netware 3 x is described in NetWare Version 3 x RPRINTER Setup on page 160 The setup using PCONSOLE in Netware 4 x or Netware 5 x is described in NetWare Version 4 x and 5 x RPRINTER Setup on page 166 187 Chapter 7 Novell Host Configuration 10 100Base T 188 Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS Netware 3 x Netware 4 x And Netware 5 x If you would like to reference a Bindery queue when you perform your PSERVER setup in NDS you must create a PSERVER object for the NIC on the file server where the Bindery queue resides This is important because in order to service the queue the NIC must log in to the queue s file server Since the queue is not an NDS queue the NIC cannot log in under NDS so it must log in under Bindery This will only work if there is a valid PSERVER object on the file s
289. tings to flash memory so they are retained after a power cycle This ensures all current settings match what is stored in flash memory store tn dest lt dxprn gt mode 5250 3270 Example store tn dest dlprn mode 3270 Store the TN protocol mode Default 5250 319 Chapter 15 Complete Command List 320 store tn dest lt dxprn gt host lt IPaddress gt Example store tn dest dlprn host 192 75 11 1 Store the IP address of the TN5250 3270 host Default Unconfigured empty IP address store tn dest lt dxprn gt port lt portnum gt Example store tn dest dlprn port 27 Store the UDP port number of the TN server Default 23 store tn dest lt dxprn gt devicedesc lt devname gt Example store tn dest dlprn devicedesc MOCHA3812 Store the name of the printer device The description entered will be the name of the printer device created on the AS 400 host for the current session Default Unconfigured empty description store tn dest lt dxprn gt connect lt resourcename gt Example store tn dest dlprn connect MYRESNM Store the resource name for the host session The resource name must be the same as the name of the printer device created on the host for the session Default Unconfigured empty resource name store tn dest lt dxprn gt msgqname lt msgqname gt Example store tn dest dlprn msqqname QSYSOPR Store the queue name to which system messages will be logged Default QSYSOPR store tn dest lt dxprn gt msgglib
290. tion w e M a O dipm O diprn 7 r dipm 7 Clear Form Figure 6 Novell Network Configuration Protocol Defines the packet structure of transmitted data or the control commands that manage the session or both 62 Novell Network FrameType This option determines which framing scheme will be used in processing Novell signals The different types of Ethernet packet formats include e Auto Sensing the default e Ethernet Il e Ethernet 802 3 e Ethernet 802 2 e 802 2 Snap Service Type Allows you to change the Nest Server The options are e Bindery e NDS e Auto File Server Define a Novell file server for the NIC to service as either a PSERVER or an RPRINTER NDS NDS Novell Directory Services is a distributed database of network information An NDS contains information that defines every object on the network For more information please see your Novell administrator Pserver Define a password for the NIC to use when logging in to the file server as a PSERVER This is an optional file server security feature 63 Chapter 3 Print Path Configuration Rprinter Define an RPRINTER setup so the NIC knows to service a PSERVER NLM on a Novell file server Define the PSERVER NLM name the number of the printer serviced by the NIC within this PSERVER NLM and the destination on the NIC you want the print jobs to pass through Print Path Configuration 64 The NIC print path is
291. tion for the TCP access list entries ADAPTER WLAN ADAPTER TCP IP Access Problem To add delete a TCP access list entry refer to TCP Access Lists on page 347 NOTE When the following procedure is used the TCP access list will be cleared but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is complete To reset all Adapter or Wireless NIC TCP IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible 1 ao fF oO DN Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel See the User s Manual for configuration menu information Power off the printer On the NIC Interface place SWITCH 1 in the down position Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state On the Adapter or Wireless NIC Interface place SWITCH 1 in the up position From a workstation attached to this network segment create an ARP entry The NIC IP address and hardware Machine Address Code MAC addresses are needed At the workstation enter arp s lt ipaddress gt lt MACaddress gt ping lt ipaddress gt Try to ping this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network If the interface does not respond verify you are on the same network segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was created Telnet into the NIC using the same IP address as above Log in as root There is no password by default At the system prompt enter store tcpip from default config http on save reset NOTE
292. tions 4 FSS FSA Pool Manage other inventory definitions 5 PrintWay Queue View IP PrintWay transmission queue 6 PrintWay Message View IP PrintWay message log 7 Configure Change panel configuration Printer Definition List Row 17 of 23 280 Printer Inventory Manager As Defined With TN3270E 2 Select option 5 from this panel to list the FSSs FSA FSS and Pool Management Option gt FSA 1 Add Add an FSA 2 List List FSAs 3 Select Select FSAs to list FSS 4 Add Add an FSS 5 List List FSSs 6 Select Select FSSs to list Pool of Printer Definitions 7 Add Add a Pool 8 List List Pools 9 Select Select Pools to list 3 From the panel below browse the PRINTWAY FSS to see how the TN3270E FSS was defined FSS List Row 1 of 3 Command gt Scroll gt HALF Actions A Add B Browse C Copy D Delete E Edit A FSS Name Type Description B PRINTWAY IPPW APPLID for TN3270E Printers APIPP101 PRT10 IPPW Howard s PrintWay FSS WTRES700 PSF Howard s FSS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Bottom of data kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 281 Chapter 12 Program Materials The panel below shows how the FSS PRINTWAY is associated with its VTAM Applid APIPP101 Browse IP PrintWay FSS Command gt FSS name PRINTWAY Description APPLID for TN3270E Printers APIPP101 extend Old style translation Hiperspace blocks TCP IP job name Document code page Applid APIPP101 Nationa
293. ttachment LANATTACH Specify IP Port number PORT Specify 5001 266 Configuring PSF with CRTDEVPRT On V4R2 and Above Font FONT Enter an appropriate value Form Feed FORMFEED Specify CONT Activation timer ACTTMR This value specifies the number of seconds that PSF waits for a printer to respond to an activation request If only one system is using the printer use the default value 170 seconds If more than one system is using the printer specify NOMAX which causes PSF to wait indefinitely for a response to an activation request Remote Location RMTLOCNAME Enter the IP address or hostname of the printer User Defined Object USRDFNOBJ To use a PSF configuration object specify its name and library here This object type must be PSFCFG For V3R7 and higher a single PSF configuration object may be referenced by multiple device descriptions if required 267 Chapter 11 Verifying The IPDS Configuration On AS 400 Verifying The IPDS Configuration On AS 400 268 To test IPDS printing 1 If it is not already on vary on the line description VRYCFG CFGTYPE LIN To start TCP IP enter STRTCP Verify that the AS 400 TCP IP interface is active Use the commana WRKTCPSTS and then select option 1 Turn the printer on and wait until the printer control panel displays ETHERNET ADAPTER IS READY To verify the printer is connected to AS 400 ping the printer from an AS 400 w
294. up again following each step carefully NOTE After completing a PSERVER setup and before beginning a new setup be sure to reboot the printer Wait at least a minute for the Print Server to login and attach to a queue RPRINTER NPRINTER Setup If you cannot get a connection with the NIC after completing the print setup confirm the following Have you tried repowering the printer Wait about a minute before checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server If so it cannot service another file server at the same time Is an entry produced when a list rprinter telnet command is done on the NIC not found on the Novell HTML status page When the NIC is configured as an RPRINTER this command should produce the appropriate entry If the NIC has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the queue there may be a permission problem Make sure the appropriate users have rights to this queue they should be in the group everyone Also you may have to assign the queue to root so it is available to everyone 197 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 198 Does the destination you used in your RPRINTER setup have the Novell service enabled Please see Commands on page 305 for information on enabling disabling services NOTE The debug information that is mentioned in the foll
295. ur Novell system Consider these points when configuring your print method e g CAPTURE NPRINT etc e Did you include the No Tabs option e Did you specify No Banner with PostScript printers e Did you turn off banner pages and form feeds if this is already taken care of within an application or on the NIC Doubling up these types of print features is easy to do since these options are provided both on the NIC in a model and within the print command e Are you running the latest version of PSERVER later than 1 22 If not upgrade the PSERVER software e InaPSERVER setup did you ensure that the printer name e g dlprn was set up as Defined Elsewhere e Is the timeout option in the CAPTURE command set high enough so the printer does not time out before the print processing has had a chance to complete This can be a problem with graphic jobs Printing Related e When garbled data persists consider the following e tab expansion xtab set on in a model with graphic jobs e the correct driver for the printer if printing from within Windows For additional information on these suggestions please refer to your Netware user manuals 201 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 10 100Base T 202 8 OS 2 Configuration Overview This chapter details a complete OS 2 configuration setup including e configuring the NIC Interface with its TCP IP settings and e configuring a new printer on an OS 2 workstat
296. uter will not be able to see your NIC In order for hosts across a router to see your NIC store a default router gateway within the print server so that any packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router automatically The router or series of routers can then take over ensuring the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your network To configure a default router gateway within the NIC 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http NICIPaddress networkConf html e g http 192 75 11 9 networkConf html1 NOTE If prompted for a User ID and password first type in root for the ID and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by default 2 Atthe Network Configuration HTML form that displays click in the first field below the Gateway heading and type in the IP address of the default router gateway for the NIC subnet Changing Workgroup Names 3 Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server to make the new settings take effect Changing Workgroup Names Windows environments define groups of related computers as workgroups By default WORKGROUP is the name that is assigned to the NIC workgroup However you may want to change this to suit your network better To do this 1 Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL http NICIPaddress networ
297. value 170 seconds If more than one system will be using the printer set the value to NOMAX which causes PSF 400 to wait indefinitely for a response to an activation request 272 Cannot PING The Printer AS 400 Troubleshooting Use this section to resolve problems configuring AS 400 on TCP IP networks Cannot PING The Printer If you have problems trying to ping the printer Verify the configuration of AS 400 including the printer and any intervening devices such as routers and bridges Verify that the AS 400 line description is varied on and the printer is turned on and displays a status of ONLINE Verify that the AS 400 TCP IP interface is active PSF 400 Terminates When Initialized If PSF 400 terminates when you initialize it for IPDS printing and issues message PQT3603 check for the following error codes Code 10 means an incorrect RMTSYS or RMTLOCNAME V3R2 V3R7 or V4R1 has been specified for the printer Code 15 means that PSF 400 timed out waiting for the printer s response Check the value you entered for Activation Timer when using WRKAFP2 CRTPSFCFG V3R2 or CRTDEVPRT V3R7 or V4R1 Codes 20 39 indicate a general communications failure Make sure all of the components in your network are operational such as routers If necessary call Printronix technical support Codes 40 59 indicate a logic error between PSF and the printer control unit Contact Printronix te
298. variable called SR_KEY which contains the default key value This can be changed to any four digit value you would like set sysinfo module novell netbios Example set sysinfo module novell Enable and disable certain network protocol stacks within the NIC Sometimes it helps to disable any protocols you are not using on your network NOTE novell option is not available on the Integrated NIC set user add del lt name gt Example set user add eng Add or remove a user on the NIC defined by lt name gt Do not delete the root user or you will be unable to configure any further settings on the print server You will have to go back to factory defaults to correct this problem 333 Chapter 15 Complete Command List set user passwd lt name gt lt password gt Example set user passwd eng mplex1 Assign a password to a defined user on the NIC set user type lt name gt root guest Example set user type eng root Assign root or guest privileges to a particular user defined by username Guest permissions allow viewing of settings only Root permissions allow complete control of the NIC set user from default Set all user settings back to factory defaults set user from stored Set all current user settings to the values stored in flash memory set user passwd snmp lt com_name gt Set the new SNMP R W community name as the lt com_name gt value set var lt var gt lt variable string gt Example se
299. vice Default NONE WSCST Library TN5250 mode As declared on the AS 400 host for the created printer device Auto Connect Specifies whether the NIC will automatically connect to the host Default Disabled Start Stop Auto Connect Specifies whether the NIC should retry automatic connection to the host Default Start if Auto Connect is currently stopped Stop if Auto Connect is currently started SNMP Configuration SNMP Configuration The SNMP Configuration form allows you to configure SNMP trap managers and the e mail alert features of NIC It allows you to configure how SNMP alerts are processed by a SNMP trap manager a Unix syslog logging daemon and or have e mail notifications sent Up to 10 SNMP trap managers and e mail recipients may be specified Individual alerts fall into one of 14 alert group categories providing the ability to filter alert notices as desired SNMP Manager Alert Posting Settings Alert Posting Configuration 1 SNMP Manager Alert Posting l Enabled SNMP Manager IP Address UDP Port Community Name Figure 14 SNMP Manager Alert Posting Configuration Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for this configuration will be sent to the SNMP manager If this option is enabled the following information must be entered e SNMP Manager IP Address specifies the IP address of the SNMP trap manager e UDP Port specifies the UDP port number used b
300. wer the printer off and then back on 12 Wait for the E NET READY message to display 13 Set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway parameters to the desired values See Configuration Tools on page 34 243 Chapter 10 AS 400 ASCII Troubleshooting 244 Web Browser HTTP Problem In some cases you may not be able to browse the printer Web page simply because the NIC HTTP may be turned off If you cannot ping the NIC IP address make sure the IP address subnet mask and default gateway are set correctly by checking the ETHERNET PARAMS menu from the control panel See the User s Manual for configuration menu information If you can ping the NIC IP address but cannot access the Web pages perform the following procedure to verify the NIC HTTP is turned on 1 Telnet into the NIC and log in as root with no password 2 Atthe system prompt enter the following commands config http on save reset 3 After approximately 5 minutes point your browser to the NIC IP address The printer Web pages should now be accessible If you still experience difficulty accessing or browsing the printer contact the Customer Solutions Center for further assistance l l AS 400 Configuration IPDS Printer Configuring On AS 400 As An IPDS Printer NOTE The IPDS emulation is not supported on the T4204 printer Use this chapter to configure your printer on AS 400 as an IPDS printer To print IPDS you must install th
301. ws 98 Windows Me WIndows NT and Windows 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc FTP Software and OnNet are trademarks or registered trademarks of FTP Software Inc NetManage and Chameleon are trademarks or registered trademarks of NetManage Inc Frontier Technologies and SuperTCP are trademarks or registered trademarks of Frontier Technologies Corporation Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc HP UX is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company DG UX is a registered trademark of Data General Corporation LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Ultrix is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics Inc Table of Contents Introduction srssccire che icittenadimmeenevaguunens 17 OVEIVIOW wie a era aaa 17 What Is The NIC 0 cc cceceeeeeceneeeeeneeeteneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeee 17 What Special Features Are Available ccceeseees 18 Logical Printer Architecture 0 c ceeesececeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaees 19 Destinations QUCUES cccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeetenaeeeeenees 21 Models ahaa aaaea anaua taasan eaa diamante nated aaa aekess 21 Interfaces naaa a aaae At loan aa a diaa aeaa aE Aaaa 23 10A00Ba Se e a a eater a 24 Speed Setting for 10 100Base T
302. x ports displays follow these steps to install them a Right click on a port and select Install b Select the New port drivers radio button c Inthe Directory field type d TCPIP DLL where d is the drive where the TCPIP subdirectory exists d Click on Refresh Several PIPE LPDx port icons should appear in the Output port list If none appear type d MPTN DLL and repeat this step again NOTE If no ports appear after completing step d search your drives for the LPRPDRVR PDR and type the path to this file not including the file name in step c The final step available is to ask OS 2 support to install these ports 205 Chapter 8 OS 2 Workstation Configuration 206 e Select all the ports with the mouse pointer and click on Install The PIPE LPDx ports should now show in the Output port list The PIPE LPDx Setting dialog box displays In the LPD server field type the IP address of the NIC In the LPD printer field type the name of the defined destination queue on the NIC NOTE This name must be the name of an existing destination queue on the NIC and it must be lowercase by default Most likely you will most likely use diprn If the IPDS feature is installed queue name d4prn is not available 9 Optionally click on Help to understand the other parameters and enter those values 10 Click OK 11 Click on Create The print
303. y the SNMP trap manager for receiving trap messages Acceptable values are 162 and 49152 through 65535 e Community Name up to 15 character string specifying the trap community name 77 Chapter 3 SNMP Configuration 78 Syslog Alert Posting Settings Syslog Alert Posting M Enabled Figure 15 SNMP Syslog Alert Posting Configuration Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for this configuration will be sent to the Unix syslog daemon If this option is enabled the syslog daemon IP address must be entered in the syslog field in the System Information section of the Administration Configuration form Default Disabled E mail Alert Posting Settings Email Alert Posting M Enabled Email Address e g username domam com Short Email Format M Short Email Message Length 0 _ Send Test Message M Figure 16 SNMP Email Alert Posting Configuration SNMP Configuration Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for this configuration will be sent to the specified e mail address If this option is enabled the following information must be entered e E mail Address specifies an e mail address to which alert information will be sent e Short E mail Format specifies whether a short 15 80 character alert e mail message should be sent If enabled the message will contain the alert description the severity level device description and device name unles
304. y to them and the changes they may make necessary If you change any of the values in the TCP IP profile restart TCP IP to pick up the changes 215 Chapter 9 Configuring PSF for z OS to Print IPDS Files DATABUFFERPOOLSIZE The DATABUFFERPOOLSIZE statement defines the number and size of the data buffers For printing on TCP IP attached printers it is recommended that you specify at least 160 data buffers 32768 buffer size SMALLDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE The SMALLDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE statement defines the number of small data buffers For printing on TCP IP attached printers it is recommended that you specify at least 256 small data buffers TINYDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE The TINYDATABUFFERPOOLSIZE statement defines the number of tiny data buffers For printing on TCP IP attached printers it is recommended that you specify at least 256 tiny data buffers KEEPALIVEOPTIONS PSF relies on TCP to detect when a connection with a TCP IP attached printer is no longer usable When no data has been exchanged between PSF and its connection partner TCP sends keep alive probes to the connection partner periodically These periodic probes called keep alive transmissions enable TCP to discover when a connection is no longer usable even if the connection partner is abruptly powered off or is no longer accessible through the network The frequency of keep alive transmissions is controlled by the INTERVAL parameter on the KEEPALIVEOPTIONS statement
305. ype the following sequence at the command prompt to download the filename prg file to the printer cd dest lt Enter gt ed diprn lt Enter gt bin lt Enter gt put filename prg lt Enter gt where filename prg is the file name you noted in step 8 353 Chapter 16 NIC Naming Schemes CAUTION Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the controller board and NIC card 16 As the file downloads the FTP program shows the progress as a percentage Once the download is complete exit out of the FTP program by typing quit lt Enter gt 17 When the new program has successfully loaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O off 18 Unplug the AC power cord from the printer 19 Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer 20 Using the configuration printout s reconfigure the printer and reload any optional font files NIC Naming Schemes 354 A single I O Port destination can be configured with a variety of model and logpath combinations For instance once you set the parameters for m1 and l1 you can assign the model and logpath to more than one I O port destination such as d1prn d2prn and d8prn You may now use the same set of model and logpath parameters more than once without having to redefine those parameters each time for another I O Port destination Periodi

User`s Manual - ThePrinterPlace.com

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents